WO2023284534A1 - 一种随机接入方法及通信装置 - Google Patents

一种随机接入方法及通信装置 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2023284534A1
WO2023284534A1 PCT/CN2022/101293 CN2022101293W WO2023284534A1 WO 2023284534 A1 WO2023284534 A1 WO 2023284534A1 CN 2022101293 W CN2022101293 W CN 2022101293W WO 2023284534 A1 WO2023284534 A1 WO 2023284534A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
random access
terminal device
rnti
access preamble
different
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
PCT/CN2022/101293
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
温容慧
余政
刘江华
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Huawei Technologies Co Ltd filed Critical Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority to EP22841173.2A priority Critical patent/EP4362596A4/en
Publication of WO2023284534A1 publication Critical patent/WO2023284534A1/zh
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W74/00—Wireless channel access
    • H04W74/08—Non-scheduled access, e.g. ALOHA
    • H04W74/0833—Random access procedures, e.g. with 4-step access
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W74/00—Wireless channel access
    • H04W74/08—Non-scheduled access, e.g. ALOHA
    • H04W74/0833—Random access procedures, e.g. with 4-step access
    • H04W74/0841—Random access procedures, e.g. with 4-step access with collision treatment

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the technical field of random access, and in particular to a random access method and a communication device.
  • the terminal device may initiate random access (random access, RA). For example, the terminal device can send a random access preamble (preamble) to the network device in a random access channel (random access channel, (RACH) occasion, RO), and receive a random access preamble within a period of time after sending the preamble.
  • RACH random access channel
  • RAR Random access response
  • This period of time is called RAR detection window, or RAR detection window or RAR window.
  • the RAR may be scrambled by a radio network temporary identifier (RNTI) corresponding to the terminal device.
  • the RNTI is mainly used to distinguish the RO occupied by the terminal device sending the preamble.
  • the RO includes time domain resources and frequency domain resources, so as to ensure that the terminal device receives the corresponding RAR on the RO sending the preamble.
  • the RNTI is determined according to the time-domain resource and frequency-domain resource index of the RO. If the initial uplink bandwidth part (bandwidth part, BWP) of the two terminal devices is different, the network device configures the RO for sending the preamble for the two terminal devices according to the respective BWP of the two terminal devices, then even if the two terminal devices are The frequency-domain resources of the configured ROs are different, but the indexes of the ROs may be the same. If the time-domain resources of the configured ROs of the two terminal devices are also the same, according to the design of the RNTI and RAR windows in the prior art, two terminals will The RNTI determined by the device according to the RO is the same. Therefore, different end devices may not be distinguished by RNTI. As a result, random access resource conflicts are caused, and communication efficiency is low.
  • BWP bandwidth part
  • the present application provides a random access method and a communication device, which can reduce random access resource conflicts and improve communication efficiency.
  • the first aspect provides a random access method that can be executed by a first communication device, and the first communication device can be a communication device or a communication device capable of supporting the communication device to implement the functions required by the method, such as a chip system.
  • the following description is made by taking the communication device as a terminal device as an example.
  • the method includes:
  • the terminal device sends a random access preamble in the first RO, determines a first RNTI according to s_id, t_id, f_id, ul_carrier_id and first information, and then receives a downlink channel according to the first RNTI.
  • the first information includes one or more of a, b, c and d.
  • s_id is the index of the first orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (orthogonal frequency division multiplexing, OFDM) symbol of the first RO.
  • t_id is the index in the radio frame of the first time slot where the first RO is located.
  • f_id is the index of the first RO in the frequency domain.
  • ul_carrier_id is the identifier of the uplink carrier used to send the random access preamble.
  • each terminal device can determine whether the detected RAR belongs to itself according to the RNTI, so as to ensure that the terminal device receives the correct RAR as much as possible, and improve the success rate of random access of the terminal device.
  • the first information is associated with at least one of the following characteristic parameters: the type of the terminal device, the capability of the terminal device, the complexity of the terminal device, the bandwidth of the terminal device, the number of antennas of the terminal device, message 3 transmission type, data transmission type, slice capability indication, BWP identifier (identifier, ID), or BWP size.
  • the maximum value of a or the value range of a is related to at least one of the following parameters: the length of the random access preamble, the length of the time domain resource of the random access preamble, and the length of the BWP where the first RO is located. configuration.
  • the maximum value of a or the value range of a may depend on one or more of the above parameters, so as to ensure that the RNTI determined by a can distinguish more different terminal devices.
  • the maximum value of b or the value range of b is related to at least one of the following parameters: the subcarrier spacing of the random access preamble, the length of the random access preamble, and the time domain of the random access preamble The length of the resource, the number of time slots included in a radio frame that can be used to send the random access preamble, or the number of time slots included in a subframe that can be used to send the random access preamble.
  • the maximum value of b or the value range of b can be determined according to the above parameters, so as to ensure that the RNTI determined by b can distinguish more different terminal devices.
  • the sum of a and s_id is less than 14. In this way, the same RNTI determined by symbols in different time slots can be avoided, so that different terminal devices can be distinguished through the RNTI, and the success rate of random access of the terminal device can be improved.
  • the sum of b and t_id is less than 80. In this way, the same RNTI determined by using time slots in different radio frames can be avoided, so that different terminal devices can be distinguished through the RNTI, and the success rate of random access of the terminal device can be improved.
  • the sum of c and f_id is less than 8. In this way, the same RNTI determined by using different uplink carriers can be avoided, so that different terminal devices can be distinguished through the RNTI, and the success rate of random access of the terminal device can be improved.
  • the sum of d and ul_carrier_id is less than 3. This can prevent the determined RNTI from exceeding the maximum allowable range of the RNTI, that is, avoid determining an invalid RNTI.
  • the length of the time domain resource of the random access preamble is greater than or equal to L, and L is an integer greater than 2.
  • the number of time slots available for sending the random access preamble included in one radio frame is less than or equal to 80.
  • the number of time slots available for sending the random access preamble included in a subframe is less than or equal to N, where N is an integer less than 2 ⁇ , and ⁇ is a subcarrier spacing (subcarrier spacing, SCS) parameter.
  • the number of subframes available for sending the random access preamble included in a radio frame is less than or equal to P, where P is an integer less than 10.
  • the value of the frequency division multiplexing parameter of the random access preamble is less than Q, and Q is an integer less than 8.
  • different first information associations have different feature parameter sets, and the feature parameter sets include one or more feature parameters.
  • This solution distinguishes different types of terminal devices by configuring the type of characteristic parameters of the terminal devices that the RO corresponding to the same RNTI sends the random access preamble to reduce the random access delay of various terminal devices.
  • the second aspect provides a random access method that can be executed by a second communication device.
  • the second communication device can be a communication device or a communication device that can support the communication device to implement the functions required by the method, such as a chip system.
  • the following description is made by taking the communication device as a network device as an example.
  • the method includes:
  • the network device receives the random access preamble from the terminal device in the first RO, and based on the first information, the index s_id of the first OFDM symbol of the first RO, the index t_id of the first slot of the first RO, the index t_id of the first slot of the first RO, An index f_id of the RO in the frequency domain and an identifier ul_carrier_id of the uplink carrier used to send the random access preamble determine the first RNTI, and send the downlink channel based on the first RNTI.
  • the first information includes one or more of a, b, c and d.
  • the first information is associated with at least one of the following characteristic parameters: the type of the terminal device, the capability of the terminal device, the complexity of the terminal device, the bandwidth of the terminal device, the number of antennas of the terminal device, message 3
  • the transfer type of data the transfer type of data, slice capability indication, BWP ID, or BWP size.
  • the maximum value of a or the value range of a is related to at least one of the following parameters: the length of the random access preamble, the length of the time domain resource of the random access preamble, and the length of the BWP where the first RO is located. configuration.
  • the maximum value of b or the value range of b is related to at least one of the following parameters: the subcarrier spacing of the random access preamble, the length of the random access preamble, and the time domain resources of the random access preamble. Length, the number of time slots included in a radio frame that can be used to send random access preambles, and the number of time slots that can be used to send random access preambles included in a subframe.
  • the sum of a and s_id is less than 14, the sum of b and t_id is less than 80, the sum of c and f_id is less than 8, or the sum of d and ul_carrier_id is less than 3.
  • the length of the time domain resource of the random access preamble is greater than or equal to L, and L is an integer greater than 2.
  • the number of time slots available for sending random access preambles included in a radio frame is less than or equal to 80.
  • the number of time slots available for sending random access preamble included in a subframe is less than or equal to N, where N is an integer less than 2 ⁇ , and ⁇ is an SCS parameter.
  • the number of subframes available for sending the random access preamble included in a radio frame is less than or equal to P, where P is an integer less than 10.
  • different first information associations have different feature parameter sets, and the feature parameter sets include one or more feature parameters.
  • a third aspect provides a random access method that can be executed by a first communication device, and the first communication device may be a communication device or a communication device capable of supporting the communication device to implement functions required by the method, such as a chip system.
  • the following description is made by taking the communication device as a terminal device as an example. The method includes:
  • the terminal device sends a random access preamble to the network device, and receives a media access control (media access control, MAC) protocol data unit (protocol data unit, PDU) from the network device.
  • a MAC PDU consists of multiple sub-protocol data units (subPDUs).
  • the terminal device determines M, and obtains a random access response for the random access preamble in K subPDUs associated with M.
  • M is a positive integer
  • K is a positive integer.
  • the value of the first field in each subPDU of the first (K-1) subPDUs of the K subPDUs is 1, and the value of the first field of the first subPDU of the first subPDU of the K subPDUs is 0 , the value of the first field of the Kth subPDU of the K subPDUs is 0.
  • the first field is a T field or an E field.
  • a RAR corresponding to a terminal device is included between the K-1 subPDU whose first field is "0" and the K-th subPDU whose first field is "0".
  • Different terminal devices correspond to different M, so that each terminal device can determine which sub PDUs to obtain RAR according to M, so as to achieve the purpose of distinguishing different terminal devices.
  • the fourth aspect provides a random access method that can be executed by a second communication device.
  • the second communication device can be a communication device or a communication device capable of supporting the communication device to implement the functions required by the method, such as a chip system.
  • the following description is made by taking the communication device as a network device as an example.
  • the method includes:
  • the network device receives the random access preamble from the terminal device, scrambles the RAR based on the RNTI, and sends a MAC PDU to the terminal device.
  • a MAC PDU includes multiple subPDUs. K subPDUs associated with M among the plurality of subPDUs carry random access responses for the random access preamble.
  • the value of the first field in each subPDU of the first (K-1) subPDUs of the K subPDUs is 1, and the value of the first field of the first subPDU of the first subPDU of the K subPDUs is 0 , the value of the first field of the Kth subPDU of the K subPDUs is 0.
  • the first field is a T field or an E field
  • M is a positive integer
  • K is a positive integer.
  • a fifth aspect provides a random access method that can be executed by a first communication device, and the first communication device may be a communication device or a communication device capable of supporting the communication device to implement the functions required by the method, such as a chip system.
  • the following description is made by taking the communication device as a terminal device as an example. The method includes:
  • the terminal device sends a random access preamble to the network device, determines the starting position of the RAR window based on the second information, and receives the RAR from the network device according to the determined starting position of the RAR window.
  • the second information is used to indicate the offset of the starting position of the RAR window.
  • the offset granularity of the starting position of the RAR window may be a symbol, a time slot, or a control resource set (CORESET).
  • the starting position of the RAR window is the first symbol of the first CORESET after M1 symbols after the last symbol of the PRACH.
  • M1 is a positive integer
  • the second information is used to indicate M1. That is, the offset granularity of the starting position of the RAR window is a symbol.
  • the second information is used to indicate M2. That is, the offset granularity of the starting position of the RAR window is a time slot.
  • the starting position of the RAR window is the first symbol of the M3-th CORESET one symbol after the last symbol of the RPACH, and M3 is an integer greater than 1.
  • the second information is used to indicate M3. That is, the offset granularity of the starting position of the RAR window is CORESET.
  • a sixth aspect provides a random access method that can be executed by a second communication device, and the second communication device can be a communication device or a communication device capable of supporting the communication device to implement the functions required by the method, such as a chip system.
  • the following description is made by taking the communication device as a network device as an example.
  • the method includes:
  • the network device receives the random access preamble from the terminal device, determines the starting position of the RAR window, and sends the RAR to the terminal device according to the determined starting position of the RAR window.
  • the second information is used to indicate the offset of the starting position of the RAR window.
  • the starting position of the RAR window is the first symbol of the first CORESET after M1 symbols after the last symbol of the PRACH.
  • M1 is a positive integer
  • the second information is used to indicate M1.
  • the starting position of the RAR window is the first symbol of the M3-th CORESET one symbol after the last symbol of the RPACH, and M3 is an integer greater than 1.
  • the second information is used to indicate M3.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a communication device
  • the communication device can have the function of implementing the behavior in the method example of the first aspect above, and the beneficial effects can be referred to the description of the first aspect, which will not be repeated here.
  • the communication device may be the terminal device in the first aspect, or the communication device may be a device capable of supporting the functions required by the terminal device in the first aspect to implement the method provided in the first aspect, such as a chip or a chip system.
  • the communication device may also have the function of implementing the behavior in the method example of the third aspect above, and the beneficial effects may refer to the description of the third aspect and will not be repeated here.
  • the communication device may be the terminal device in the third aspect, or the communication device may be a device capable of supporting the terminal device in the third aspect to implement the functions required by the method provided in the third aspect, such as a chip or a chip system.
  • the communication device may also have the function of implementing the behavior in the method example of the fifth aspect above, and the beneficial effects may refer to the description of the fifth aspect and will not be repeated here.
  • the communication device may be the terminal device in the fifth aspect, or the communication device may be a device capable of supporting the functions required by the terminal device in the fifth aspect to implement the method provided in the fifth aspect, such as a chip or a chip system.
  • the communication device includes corresponding means or modules for performing the method of the first aspect or the third aspect or the fifth aspect.
  • the communication device includes a processing unit (sometimes also called a processing module) and/or a transceiver unit (sometimes also called a transceiver module). These units (modules) can perform the corresponding functions in the method examples of the first aspect, the third aspect, or the fifth aspect.
  • a processing unit sometimes also called a processing module
  • a transceiver unit sometimes also called a transceiver module.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a communication device
  • the communication device can have the function of implementing the behavior in the method example of the second aspect above, and the beneficial effects can refer to the description of the second aspect and will not be repeated here.
  • the communication device may be the terminal device in the second aspect, or the communication device may be a device capable of supporting the functions required by the terminal device in the second aspect to implement the method provided in the second aspect, such as a chip or a chip system.
  • the communication device may also have the function of implementing the behavior in the method example of the fourth aspect above, and the beneficial effects may refer to the description of the fourth aspect and will not be repeated here.
  • the communication device may be the terminal device in the fourth aspect, or the communication device may be a device capable of supporting the functions required by the terminal device in the fourth aspect to implement the method provided in the fourth aspect, such as a chip or a chip system.
  • the communication device may also have the function of implementing the behavior in the method example of the sixth aspect above, and the beneficial effects may refer to the description of the sixth aspect and will not be repeated here.
  • the communication device may be the terminal device in the sixth aspect, or the communication device may be a device capable of supporting the functions required by the terminal device in the sixth aspect to implement the method provided in the sixth aspect, such as a chip or a chip system.
  • the communication device includes corresponding means or modules for performing the method of the second aspect or the fourth aspect.
  • the communication device includes a processing unit (sometimes also called a processing module) and/or a transceiver unit (sometimes also called a transceiver module).
  • a processing unit sometimes also called a processing module
  • a transceiver unit sometimes also called a transceiver module.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, which may be the communication device in the seventh aspect or the eighth aspect in the above embodiments, or the communication device set in the seventh aspect or the eighth aspect chip or system-on-a-chip.
  • the communication device includes a communication interface, a processor, and optionally, a memory.
  • the memory is used to store computer programs or instructions or data
  • the processor is coupled with the memory and the communication interface, and when the processor reads the computer programs or instructions or data, the communication device executes the method described above in the embodiment of the terminal device or methods implemented by network devices.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, where the communication device includes an input and output interface and a logic circuit.
  • the input and output interfaces are used to input and/or output information.
  • the logic circuit is used to implement the method described in any one or more aspects of the first aspect to the sixth aspect.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a chip system
  • the chip system includes a processor, and may also include a memory and/or a communication interface, for implementing any one or more of the first aspect to the sixth aspect method described in the aspect.
  • the chip system further includes a memory, configured to store program instructions and/or data.
  • the system-on-a-chip may consist of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a communication system
  • the communication system includes the communication device for executing the method of the first aspect in the seventh aspect and the communication device for executing the method of the second aspect in the eighth aspect .
  • the communication system includes the communication device in the seventh aspect for executing the method of the third aspect and the communication device in the eighth aspect for executing the method of the fourth aspect.
  • the communication system includes the communication device in the seventh aspect for executing the method of the fifth aspect and the communication device in the eighth aspect for executing the method of the sixth aspect.
  • the communication system includes the communication device for executing the method of the first aspect in the seventh aspect and the communication device for executing the method of the second aspect in the eighth aspect.
  • the communication system includes the communication device for executing the method of the third aspect in the seventh aspect and the communication device for executing the method of the fourth aspect in the eighth aspect.
  • the communication system includes the communication device for executing the method of the fifth aspect in the seventh aspect and the communication device for executing the method of the sixth aspect in the eighth aspect.
  • the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, the computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program, and when the computer program is executed, one or more of the above-mentioned first to sixth aspects can be realized methods in multiple aspects.
  • a computer program product comprising: computer program code, when the computer program code is executed, one or more of the above first to sixth aspects The methods in the aspect are executed.
  • FIG. 1 is an application schematic diagram of an example of RA-RNTI in the prior art
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of different terminal devices corresponding to the same RA-RNTI
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of different types of terminal equipment corresponding to the same RA-RNTI
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a network architecture applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart of a first random access method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of four terminal devices calculating the values of a corresponding to RA-RNTI respectively;
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of two terminal devices calculating the values of a corresponding to RA-RNTI respectively;
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic flowchart of a second random access method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of two groups of RO and RAR windows provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of the first information (a) used by three terminal devices provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of a random access process provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 12 is the first structural diagram of the MAC PDU provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic flowchart of a second random access method provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 14 is a second structural schematic diagram of the MAC PDU provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 15A is a schematic diagram of a third structure of the MAC PDU provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 15B is a schematic diagram of a fourth structure of the MAC PDU provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 17 is another schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 18 is another schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 19 is another schematic structural diagram of another communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device In order to realize data transmission between the terminal device and the network device, the terminal device establishes a connection with the network device through a random access process.
  • the terminal device may send a preamble (also called message 1 (message1, Msg1)) to the network device to initiate the random access process.
  • a preamble also called message 1 (message1, Msg1)
  • the network device After the network device detects the preamble, it calculates an RNTI according to the RO that sent the preamble, and scrambles the RAR (also called message 2 (message2, Msg2)) to be sent to the terminal device according to the RNTI, and scrambles the scrambled After the RAR is sent to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device calculates an RNTI according to the RO that sends the preamble, and starts to monitor the RAR of the network device using the RNTI identifier in the RAR window after a period of time (for example, the first time interval) after sending the preamble.
  • the first time interval is defined by the 3GPP protocol.
  • the start time of the RAR window monitoring is the last sub-frame (sub-frame) + 3 sub-frames (the first sub-frame) of the terminal device sending the preamble a time interval); in the NR system, the start time of RAR monitoring is the last symbol (symbol) sent by the terminal device plus a certain fixed time (the first time interval).
  • the terminal device can correctly receive the RAR.
  • the RNTI is RA-RNTI
  • the RA-RNTI satisfies the formula (1-1):
  • RA-RNTI 1+s_id+14 ⁇ t_id+14 ⁇ 80 ⁇ f_id+14 ⁇ 80 ⁇ 8 ⁇ ul_carrier_id (1-1)
  • s_id is the index of the first OFDM symbol in the slot where the RO is located
  • t_id is the index of the first slot (slot) in the radio frame where the RO is located
  • f_id is the index of the first OFDM symbol where the RO is located.
  • Index in the frequency domain ul_carrier_id is the index of the uplink carrier.
  • the radio frame herein is also referred to as a frame, in other words, the radio frame herein may be replaced by a frame.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of an application of RA-RNTI.
  • FIG. 1 takes a subcarrier bandwidth (subcarrier space, SCS) of 120 kHz as an example.
  • SCS subcarrier space
  • the f_id corresponding to RO2 is 1, the f_id corresponding to RO3 is 0, and the f_id corresponding to RO4 is 1.
  • RNTI is the RNTI of MSGB (MSGB-RNTI) satisfying the formula (1-2):
  • MSGB-RNTI 1+s_id+14 ⁇ t_id+14 ⁇ 80 ⁇ f_id+14 ⁇ 80 ⁇ 8 ⁇ ul_carrier_id+14 ⁇ 80 ⁇ 8 ⁇ 2 (1-2)
  • formula (1-2) has one more constant than formula (1-1), that is, "14 ⁇ 80 ⁇ 8 ⁇ 2" .
  • This constant is mainly used to distinguish from the contention-based 4-step random access RNTI (that is, RA-RNTI).
  • RA-RNTI contention-based 4-step random access RNTI
  • the RNTI in this embodiment of the present application is an RNTI that can be used to identify, monitor or detect a random access response.
  • RA-RNTI is taken as an example in the following. It should be understood that RA-RNTI+14 ⁇ 80 ⁇ 8 ⁇ 2 is equivalent to MSGB-RNTI in the full text if there is no conflict.
  • the network device configures ROs for sending preamble for the two terminal devices according to their respective BWPs, then the frequency domain resource indexes of the configured ROs of the two terminal devices may be the same . If the two terminal devices are configured with the same RO time domain resources, the current RAR window design is used to determine the RA-RNTI according to formula (1-1), which will result in the same RA-RNTI corresponding to the RAR received by the two terminal devices .
  • the RA-RNTI may not be able to distinguish different terminal devices, which may cause one terminal device to receive the RAR belonging to another terminal device, that is, cause the terminal device to receive a wrong RAR. It should be understood that if the initial downlink BWPs of two terminal devices are the same, the time domain resources of the ROs of the two (or two types or two groups) of terminal devices sending the preamble may be the same, and the index of the frequency domain resources of the ROs may also be Similarly, the problem that the RA-RNTI may not be able to distinguish different terminal devices also occurs.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of ROs corresponding to two terminal devices.
  • FIG. 3 takes two terminal devices as a terminal device 1 and a terminal device 2 as an example.
  • the initial uplink BWP of terminal device 1 is BWP1
  • the initial uplink BWP of terminal device 2 is BWP2.
  • the network device configures ROs for terminal devices in BWP1
  • the network device configures ROs for terminal devices in BWP2.
  • there are 4 ROs on both BWP1 and BWP2 and these 4 ROs are RO-1, RO-2, RO-3 and RO-4.
  • the index of the frequency domain resource of RO-1 in BWP1 is the same as the index of the frequency domain resource of RO-1 in BWP2.
  • the time domain resource of RO-1 in BWP1 is the same as the time domain resource of RO-1 in BWP2.
  • the frequency domain resource indexes of RO-1 on BWP1 and RO-1 on BWP2 are also the same.
  • the RA-RNTI corresponding to terminal device 1 and the RA corresponding to terminal device 2 -RNTIs are the same.
  • the RA-RNTI corresponding to the RAR detected by terminal device 1 and terminal device 2 in the same RAR window is the same, then terminal device 1 and terminal device 2 cannot determine whether the detected RAR belongs to them according to the RA-RNTI, which will cause the terminal device 1 Possibility to acquire RAR belonging to terminal device 2. That is, the terminal device 1 receives the wrong RAR.
  • terminal equipment such as traditional legacy terminal equipment, REDCAP terminal equipment, coverage enhancement (coverage enhancement, CE) terminal equipment, small data transmission (small data transmission, SDT) ) terminal equipment, access network slicing (RAN slicing) terminal equipment.
  • REDCAP terminal equipment coverage enhancement (coverage enhancement, CE) terminal equipment
  • coverage enhancement coverage enhancement
  • CE coverage enhancement
  • SDT small data transmission
  • RAN slicing access network slicing
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of ROs corresponding to two types of terminal devices.
  • the two types of terminal devices are, for example, common (legacy) terminal devices and low complexity (reduced capability, REDCAP) terminal devices.
  • the initial uplink BWP of REDCAP terminal equipment is BWP1
  • the initial uplink BWP of legacy terminal equipment is BWP2.
  • the REDCAP terminal device sends a preamble on RO1 on BWP1
  • the legacy terminal device sends a preamble on RO2 on BWP2.
  • the time domain resources of RO1 and RO2 are the same, and the indexes of the frequency domain resources of RO1 and RO2 are the same.
  • the start time of RAR window monitoring corresponding to REDCAP terminal equipment and legacy terminal equipment is the same, and the RA-RNTI corresponding to REDCAP terminal equipment is the same as the RA-RNTI corresponding to legacy terminal equipment . Therefore, in the random access process, it may not be possible to distinguish different types of terminal devices based on the RA-RNTI.
  • the number of RA-RNTIs used for RAR per unit time will increase.
  • the current RA-RNTI RNTI is insufficient to distinguish between multiple types of end devices.
  • the value range of RA-RNTI is 0001-FFF2 (that is, 1-65522).
  • the value range of the RNTI is 0 to 65535. Therefore, the RNTI can also indicate one type of terminal device or one group of terminal devices in this manner, but cannot indicate more types or groups of terminal devices.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides five technical solutions.
  • the five technical solutions provided in the embodiments of the present application can be applied to various communication systems, such as LTE systems, fifth generation (5th generation, 5G) systems, such as new radio (new radio, NR) systems, and next-generation Communication systems, such as 6G systems or other similar communication systems, are not specifically limited.
  • the communication system includes network devices and terminal devices, and the network devices and terminal devices can communicate with each other.
  • the network architecture in FIG. 4 is an example of communication between a network device and a terminal device.
  • the number of network devices and terminal devices in the communication system can be more, and between network devices and network devices, Alternatively, terminal devices may also communicate with each other.
  • a network device can communicate with multiple terminal devices at the same time. Multiple network devices can also communicate with a terminal device at the same time.
  • the terminal equipment may be user equipment (user equipment, UE), sometimes also referred to as a terminal, an access station, a UE station, a remote station, a wireless communication device, or a user device, etc.
  • UE user equipment
  • a terminal device is a device with a wireless transceiver function, which can send signals to or receive signals from network devices.
  • the terminal device is used to connect people, things, machines, etc., and can be widely used in various scenarios, including but not limited to the following scenarios: cellular communication, device-to-device communication (device-to-device, D2D), car-to-everything (vehicle to everything, V2X), machine-to-machine/machine-type communications (machine-to-machine/machine-type communications, M2M/MTC), Internet of things (Internet of things, IoT), virtual reality (virtual reality, VR) , augmented reality (augmented reality, AR), industrial control (industrial control), unmanned driving (self driving), telemedicine (remote medical), smart grid (smart grid), smart furniture, smart office, smart wear, smart transportation , Terminal equipment for smart cities, drones, robots and other scenarios.
  • cellular communication device-to-device communication
  • D2D device-to-device, D2D
  • car-to-everything vehicle to everything
  • V2X machine-to-machine/mach
  • the terminal device in the embodiment of the present application may be a mobile phone (mobile phone), a tablet computer (Pad), a computer with a wireless transceiver function, a virtual reality (virtual reality, VR) terminal, an augmented reality (augmented reality, AR) terminal , wireless terminals in industrial control, wireless terminals in self driving, smart speakers in IoT networks, wireless terminal devices in telemedicine, wireless terminal devices in smart grids, and transportation safety Wireless terminal equipment, wireless terminal equipment in a smart city, or wireless terminal equipment in a smart home, etc.
  • the terminal device may also be a wearable device.
  • Wearable devices can also be called wearable smart devices or smart wearable devices, etc., which is a general term for the application of wearable technology to intelligently design daily wear and develop wearable devices, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing and shoes Wait.
  • Terminal devices may also include relays. Or it can be understood that all devices capable of performing data communication with the base station can be regarded as terminal devices.
  • the various terminal devices described above, if they are located on the vehicle (for example, placed in the vehicle or installed in the vehicle), can be considered as vehicle-mounted terminal devices. ).
  • a terminal device may refer to a device for implementing a terminal function, or may be a device capable of supporting a terminal device to implement the function, such as a chip system, and the device may be installed in the terminal device.
  • the terminal can also be a vehicle detector.
  • the system-on-a-chip may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • a network device is an access device for a terminal device to wirelessly access the mobile communication system, including an access network (access network, AN) device, such as a base station.
  • a network device may also refer to a device that communicates with a terminal device over an air interface.
  • the network equipment may include the evolved base station (evolutional Node B) in the LTE system or the long term evolution-advanced (LTE-A), which may be referred to as eNB or e-NodeB); or may also include the 5G NR system
  • the next generation node B (next generation node B, gNB); or it can also include access nodes in the wireless fidelity (wIreless-fIdelity, Wi-Fi) system; or the network equipment can be a relay station, vehicle equipment, and future evolution Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN) devices, devices in device-to-device (D2D) networks, devices in machine-to-machine (M2M) networks, IoT ( Internet of things, IoT) network equipment or network equipment in other network PLMN networks.
  • PLMN Public Land Mobile Network
  • the network device in FIG. 4 may be a base station, which corresponds to different devices in different systems.
  • the network device in FIG. 4 may correspond to an eNB in a fourth generation mobile communication technology (the fourth generation, 4G) system, Corresponds to gNB in the 5G system.
  • 4G fourth generation mobile communication technology
  • the base station in this embodiment of the present application may include a centralized unit (centralized unit, CU) and a distributed unit (distributed unit, DU), and multiple DUs may be centrally controlled by one CU.
  • CU and DU can be divided according to the protocol layer functions of the wireless network they have. For example, the functions of the packet data convergence protocol (packet data convergence protocol, PDCP) layer and the protocol layer above are set in the protocol layer below the CU and PDCP, such as the wireless link Functions such as the radio link control (radio link control, RLC) layer and the medium access control (medium access control, MAC) layer are set in the DU.
  • packet data convergence protocol packet data convergence protocol
  • RLC radio link control
  • MAC medium access control
  • the radio frequency device can be remote, not placed in the DU, or integrated in the DU, or partially remote and partially integrated in the DU, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the control plane (control plan, CP) and the user plane (user plan, UP) of the CU can also be separated and divided into different entities for implementation, respectively being the control plane CU entity (CU-CP entity) And user plane CU entity (CU-UP entity).
  • the signaling generated by the CU can be sent to the terminal device through the DU, or the signaling generated by the UE can be sent to the CU through the DU.
  • the DU can directly transmit the signaling to the UE or CU through protocol layer encapsulation without parsing the signaling.
  • the CU is divided into network devices on the radio access network (radio access network, RAN) side.
  • the CU can also be divided into network devices on the core network (core network, CN) side. This is not limited.
  • Solution 1 is to provide a new RNTI design.
  • the RNTI determined through this design can ensure that different RA-RNTIs correspond to terminal devices accessed through different ROs, so that different terminal devices can be distinguished through RA-RNTI.
  • an offset can be designed for the RA-RNTI, and different terminal devices correspond to different offsets, so that terminal devices accessed by different ROs can still be distinguished through the RA-RNTI.
  • the network device and the terminal device also determine the RA-RNTI according to the offset.
  • the design schemes of the RA-RNTI are also different, and several design schemes of the RA-RNTI are introduced below.
  • FIG. 5 is a flow chart of a random access method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device sends a preamble to the network device at the RO.
  • the terminal device may send a preamble to the network device.
  • the terminal device may send a preamble to the network device.
  • the relevant description of step1 in the 4-step RACH which will not be repeated here.
  • the network device determines the RA-RNTI according to the first information, and scrambles the RAR message based on the RA-RNTI.
  • the network device may scramble the RAR for the preamble based on the RA-RNTI.
  • the network device sends a downlink channel to the terminal device.
  • a network device may send a downlink channel to a terminal device.
  • the downlink channel is used to send the scrambled RAR.
  • the downlink channel may be a physical downlink control channel (physical downlink control channel, PDCCH) for scheduling a physical downlink shared channel (physical downlink shared channel, PDSCH) carrying the RAR.
  • PDCCH physical downlink control channel
  • the terminal device determines the RA-RNTI according to the first information, and receives the downlink channel from the network device according to the RA-RNTI.
  • the terminal device determines the RA-RNTI according to the RO and the first information sending the preamble, and starts monitoring the RAR identified by the RA-RNTI on the network device in the RAR window after a period of time after sending the preamble. For example, the terminal device receives the PDCCH for scheduling the PDSCH carrying the RAR according to the RA-RNTI.
  • the first information may be used to indicate the offset of the RA-RNTI.
  • the network device may determine the RA-RNTI according to the s_id, t_id, f_id and ul_carrier_id corresponding to the RO receiving the preamble and the first information, and scramble the RAR to be sent to the terminal device according to the RA-RNTI.
  • Different terminal devices may correspond to different offsets, so that terminal devices accessed by different ROs can still be distinguished through the RA-RNTI. It should be noted that, in the case of no conflict, different terminal devices may be different types of terminal devices, may be different groups of terminal devices, or may be different terminal devices of the same type (or the same group).
  • the offset of RA-RNTI can be realized by various designs.
  • the RA-RNTI can be offset by designing the offset of s_id, the offset of t_id, the offset of f_id, or the offset of ul_carrier_id.
  • the RA-RNTI may be offset by designing offsets of at least two of s_id, t_id, f_id, and ul_carrier_id.
  • the offset of s_id is called a
  • the offset of t_id is called b
  • the offset of f_id is called c
  • the offset of ul_carrier_id is called d.
  • the first information can be a, b, c or d.
  • the first information may include at least two of a, b, c or d.
  • a, b, c and d may be considered as parameters for determining the RA-RNTI.
  • a may be referred to as a first parameter (offset)
  • b may be referred to as a second parameter (offset)
  • c may be referred to as a third parameter (offset)
  • d may be referred to as a fourth parameter (offset).
  • the first information may include one or more of the first parameter, the second parameter, the third parameter and the fourth parameter.
  • the design schemes of the RA-RNTI are also different, and several design schemes of the RA-RNTI are introduced below.
  • an offset can be designed for s_id, that is, the first information includes a.
  • network devices and terminal devices determine the RA-RNTI according to s_id, t_id, f_id, ul_carrier_id, and the offset of s_id.
  • the time-frequency resources of the ROs do not overlap, so the interval between the starting positions of different ROs is at least the length of the time-domain resources of the preambles.
  • the length of the time domain resource of the preamble is the length of the time domain resource occupied by sending the preamble.
  • the length of the time-domain resource may be the number of symbols, the number of slots, the number of subframes, the number of frames or the number of mini-slots.
  • the length of the time domain resource of the preamble is s1 time slots, and the interval between the starting positions of different ROs is at least s1 time slots.
  • the length of the preamble time domain resource may be configured by the network device, for example, the network device configures random access channel configuration information, and the random access channel configuration information may include the length of the preamble time domain resource.
  • different terminal devices can be distinguished through the RA-RNTI calculated by different symbol indexes in the 13 symbols.
  • different terminal devices correspond to different symbol indices in the 14 symbols, or offsets of different symbol indices, or different a. That is, an offset can be designed for s_id, so that the RA-RNTI generates an offset to distinguish different terminal devices.
  • the network device sends the first information to UE1, the first information is used to instruct UE1 to use a1 when calculating the RNTI; the network device sends UE2 Sending first information, where the first information is used to instruct UE2 to use a2 when calculating the RNTI.
  • a1 and a2 correspond to the indices of two different symbols in a slot, a1 is equal to 1, and a2 is equal to 2.
  • RA-RNTI 1 For UE1, receiving the first information from the network device, RA-RNTI 1 can be determined according to a1, s_id, t_id, f_id and ul_carrier_id. Similarly, UE2 receives the first information from the network device, and can determine RA-RNTI 2 according to a2, s_id, t_id, f_id and ul_carrier_id. Since a1 and a2 are different, RA-RNTI 1 and RA-RNTI 2 are different, so the random access resources of UE1 and UE2 will not conflict.
  • the length of the time domain resource of the preamble is s2 symbols.
  • s2 may be an integer greater than 1.
  • s2 is an even number.
  • the start position intervals of different ROs are at least s2 symbols.
  • the length of the time-domain resource of the preamble is 2 symbols
  • the start positions of the time-domain resources of multiple ROs are respectively the 0th symbol of the 1st time slot, the 2nd symbol of the 1st time slot,
  • the 4th symbol of the first slot and the 6th symbol of the first slot that is to say, the time domain resources of multiple ROs only use the indices of symbols 0, 2, 4, and 6 to calculate the RNTI, and the symbol indices corresponding to 1, 3, 5 and 7 are not used to calculate the RNTI.
  • the s_id of a terminal device is an even number
  • the odd symbol index in the time slot where the s_id is located is not used.
  • the RNTI calculated according to the odd-numbered symbol index and the even-numbered symbol index can correspond to different terminal devices, or correspond to different types of terminal devices.
  • the s_id, a, or RA-RNTI of the first type of terminal equipment is an odd number
  • the s_id, a, or RA-RNTI of the second type of terminal equipment is an even number, so that the first type of terminal equipment and the second type of terminal equipment can correspond Different RNTIs.
  • the base station can configure a1 equal to 0 for UE1, and configure a2 equal to 1 for UE2.
  • s_id is 0, 2, 4 and 6, UE1 according to The symbol index calculated by s_id and a1 is an even number, and the symbol index calculated by UE2 according to s_id and a2 is an odd number, so that the RNTIs corresponding to UE1 and UE2 can be different, thereby preventing random access resource conflicts of the two types of UEs.
  • the RNTI calculated by the odd symbol index or the even symbol index is used to distinguish different terminal devices without increasing the maximum value of the RA-RNTI, thereby avoiding the situation that the RA-RNTI exceeds the range.
  • RA-RNTI can satisfy formula (2):
  • RA-RNTI 1+s_id+a+14 ⁇ t_id+14 ⁇ 80 ⁇ f_id+14 ⁇ 80 ⁇ 8 ⁇ ul_carrier_id (2)
  • a is the offset of s_id, or a is the offset of RA-RNTI.
  • Different terminal devices have different values of a, so different terminal devices correspond to different RA-RNTIs.
  • the RA-RNTI determined based on formula (2) can be used to distinguish terminal devices accessed in different ROs.
  • RO-1 of terminal device 1 on BWP1 sends a preamble
  • RO-1 of terminal device 2 on BWP2 sends a preamble.
  • the value of a corresponding to terminal device 1 is a1
  • the value of a corresponding to terminal device 2 is a2.
  • the s_id corresponding to RO-1 on BWP1 and the s_id corresponding to RO-1 on BWP2 are both 0, and the ul_carrier_id corresponding to RO-1 on BWP1 and the ul_carrier_id corresponding to RO-1 on BWP2 are both 0.
  • RA-RNTI 1 the RA-RNTI determined by terminal device 1
  • RA-RNTI2 the RA-RNTI determined by terminal device 2
  • RA-RNTI 1 and RA-RNTI 2 are also different. That is, the values of a corresponding to different terminal devices are different. Even if different terminal devices send preamble ROs with the same time domain resource and the same frequency domain resource index of the RO, different terminal devices use the same RO corresponding RA- RNTIs are also different. Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, based on the RA-RNTI determined by formula (2), terminal devices accessed by different ROs can be distinguished. That is, it is guaranteed that the scrambled RAR and RO have a corresponding relationship.
  • the scrambled RAR is in one-to-one correspondence with the RO, so as to ensure that each terminal device receives the correct RAR.
  • the values of a corresponding to different types or different groups of terminal equipment are different, and the RA-RNTI determined according to formula (2) can also distinguish different types or groups of different RO access Terminal Equipment.
  • each slot For a normal cyclic prefix (CP), each slot includes 14 OFDM symbols. If the sum of a and s_id is greater than or equal to 14, the calculated RA-RNTI will be the same as the RA-RNTI calculated using the symbols in the next slot. Therefore, in the embodiment of this application, the sum of a and s_id is less than 14. Similarly, for the extended CP, each time slot includes 13 OFDM symbols, and the sum of a and s_id is less than 13.
  • the maximum value of a or the value range of a is related to at least one of the following parameters: the length of the preamble, the length of the time domain resource of the preamble (also referred to as the length of the PRACH in this document), and the location of the RO The configuration of the BWP.
  • the preamble is a ZC sequence, and the length L of the ZC sequence, that is, the length L of the preamble can be 839 or 139 or other possible lengths. In this paper, the length of the preamble is 839 or 139 as an example.
  • the length of the time domain resource of the preamble may be the number of symbols occupied by the time domain resource for sending the preamble, or the number of time slots occupied by the time domain resource for sending the preamble.
  • the configuration of the BWP where the RO is located includes the CP type of the signal in the BWP, such as normal CP or extended CP.
  • the value of a that the network device can configure for each terminal device does not exceed the maximum value of a.
  • the values of a corresponding to different types or groups of terminal devices are different, or the values of a corresponding to different terminal devices are different.
  • Example 1 the maximum value of a can be determined according to the length L of the preamble.
  • the maximum value corresponding to a is the first value
  • the maximum value corresponding to a is the second value
  • the maximum value corresponding to a is the second value.
  • the value of s_id is always 0.
  • the maximum value of a is 13, and it can also be considered that the value range of a is [0,13].
  • the value range of a is [0,13], so it can be used to distinguish 14 or 14 types of terminal devices at most.
  • the value of s_id is always an even number, or the value of s_id is always an odd number.
  • the maximum value of a may be an odd number, for example, the maximum value of a may be 1 or 3 or 5 or 11.
  • the RA-RNTI determined by the terminal device 2 is RA-RNTI 1+1.
  • the RA-RNTI determined by the terminal device 3 is RA-RNTI 1+2.
  • the RA-RNTI determined by the terminal device 4 is RA-RNTI 1+3. That is, the RA-RNTIs calculated by the terminal device 1 to the terminal device 4 are different, so that different terminal devices can be distinguished through the RA-RNTI.
  • different terminal devices may be different types of terminal devices, terminal devices with different characteristics, or terminal devices supporting different services.
  • the different terminal devices are at least two different terminal devices in types, characteristics and services.
  • terminal device 1 is a legacy terminal device
  • terminal device 2 is a low-complexity terminal device
  • terminal device 3 is a legacy terminal device supporting coverage enhancement
  • terminal device 4 is a low-complexity terminal device supporting coverage enhancement.
  • Example 2 the maximum value of a or the value range of a may be determined according to the length of the time domain resource of the preamble.
  • the maximum value of a is less than the length of the preamble time domain resource. For example, if the length of the time domain resource of the preamble is 2 symbols, then the maximum value of a may be 1, that is, the value range of a is [0,1]. For another example, if the length of the time domain resource of the preamble is 1 time slot, then the maximum value of a may be a value from 0 to 13, that is, the value range of a is [0,13].
  • Example 3 the maximum value of a may also be determined according to the configuration of the BWP where the RO is located.
  • the maximum value of a is 13, that is, the value range of a is [0,13].
  • the configuration of the BWP where the RO is located refers to the extended CP, then the maximum value of a is 12, that is, the value range of a is [0,12].
  • the maximum value of a may be determined according to the length L of the preamble and the length of the time domain resource of the preamble.
  • the length of the time domain resources of the preamble is N symbols.
  • the maximum value of a may be an integer less than or equal to (N-1), or the value range of a is [1, N-1], which may be used to distinguish N terminal devices or N types of terminal devices.
  • the length of the PRACH is 2 symbols.
  • the terminal device 2 calculates the RA-RNTI, a 1.
  • formula (2) if the RA-RNTI determined by terminal device 1 is RA-RNTI 1, then the RA-RNTI determined by terminal device 2 is RA-RNTI 1+1. That is, the RA-RNTIs calculated by the terminal device 1 to the terminal device 2 are different, so that different terminal devices can be distinguished through the RA-RNTI.
  • the maximum value of a may be determined according to the configuration of the BWP where the RO resides and the length of the preamble time domain resource.
  • the maximum value of a may be determined according to the product of the length of the time domain resource of the preamble and the number of symbols included in the CP of the signal in the BWP where the RO is located.
  • the configuration of the BWP where the RO is located is a normal CP
  • the length of the time domain resources of the preamble is L time slots
  • the maximum value of a may be L ⁇ 14-1.
  • L is a positive integer, for example, L is 1, 3, 4, or other possible values.
  • the first information does not need to include b, that is, the RA-RNTI is offset by a. If the first information includes a and b, the maximum value of a may be 13. Different RA-RNTI offsets or RA-RNTI parameters are jointly indicated by the maximum value of b.
  • the maximum value of a may be determined according to the length L of the preamble, the configuration of the BWP where the RO is located, and the length of the time domain resource of the preamble.
  • the maximum value of a can be determined according to the product of the length of the time domain resource of the preamble and the number of symbols included in the CP of the signal in the BWP where the RO is located. Assuming that the length of the preamble time domain resources is L time slots, and the configuration of the BWP where the RO is located is a normal CP, then the maximum value of a may be L ⁇ 14-1. L is a positive integer, for example, L is 1, 3, 4, or other possible values. It should be noted that in this case, the first information does not need to include b, that is, the RA-RNTI is offset by a. If the first information includes a and b, the maximum value of a may be 13. Different RA-RNTI offsets or RA-RNTI parameters are jointly indicated by the maximum value of b.
  • Design 2 design an offset for t_id, that is, the first information includes b.
  • the network device and the terminal device determine the RA-RNTI according to the offset of t_id in addition to s_id, t_id, f_id and ul_carrier_id.
  • the time-frequency resources of the ROs do not overlap, so the interval between the starting positions of different ROs is at least the length of the time-domain resources of the preambles.
  • the length of the preamble time-domain resource is greater than 1 time slot and the RA-RNTI is calculated according to formula (1-1)
  • t_id is not used. Therefore, different terminal devices can be distinguished by the offset of t_id, or the RA-RNTI calculated by different slot indexes. For example, when the SCS of the preamble is 15kHz, the number of time slots in one radio frame is 10. Therefore, the value range of t-id during RA-RNTI calculation can be any value between [0,9].
  • formula (1-1) is calculated according to the fact that one radio frame includes 80 time slots, so at least 70 t_ids are not used. That is, 0 to 9 in t_id may be used, and 10 to 79 in t_id are not used.
  • an offset can be designed for t_id, and different terminal devices correspond to different t_id offsets, so that the RA-RNTI generates an offset to distinguish different terminal devices.
  • RA-RNTI can satisfy formula (3):
  • RA-RNTI 1+s_id+14 ⁇ (t_id+b)+14 ⁇ 80 ⁇ f_id+14 ⁇ 80 ⁇ 8 ⁇ ul_carrier_id (3)
  • b is the offset of t_id, and 14 ⁇ b can also be considered as the offset of RA-RNTI.
  • the values of b corresponding to different terminal devices are different, or the values of b corresponding to different types or groups of terminal devices are different.
  • RO-1 of terminal device 1 on BWP1 sends a preamble
  • RO-1 of terminal device 2 on BWP2 sends a preamble
  • the value of b corresponding to terminal device 1 is b1
  • the value of b corresponding to terminal device 2 is b2.
  • the s_id corresponding to RO-1 on BWP1 and the s_id corresponding to RO-1 on BWP2 are both 0, and the ul_carrier_id corresponding to RO-1 on BWP1 and the ul_carrier_id corresponding to RO-1 on BWP2 are both 0.
  • RA-RNTI 1 the RA-RNTI determined by the terminal device 1
  • RA-RNTI 2 the RA-RNTI determined by the terminal device 2
  • the values of RA-RNTI 1 and RA-RNTI 2 are also different. That is, the value of b corresponding to different terminal devices can be different. Even if different terminal devices have the same time-domain resource of the RO sending the preamble, and the index of the frequency domain resource of the RO is the same, the RA corresponding to the RO used by different terminal devices - RNTI is also different. Therefore, the embodiment of the present application can distinguish terminal devices accessed by different ROs based on the RA-RNTI determined by formula (3). That is, it is ensured that the scrambled RAR has a corresponding relationship with the RO, and that each terminal device receives the correct RAR. Similarly, following the example in Figure 4, the values of b corresponding to different types or different groups of terminal equipment are different, and the RA-RNTI determined according to formula (3) can also distinguish different types or groups of different RO access Terminal Equipment.
  • the RNTI includes 80 time slot reservation intervals according to a 10ms radio frame. If the sum of b and t_id is greater than or equal to 80, then there will be RA-RNTI calculated using the time slot in the previous radio frame and using When the RA-RNTI calculated for the slot in the next radio frame is the same. Therefore, in the embodiment of this application, the sum of b and t_id is less than 80.
  • the maximum value of b is related to at least one of the following parameters: the SCS of the preamble, the length of the preamble, the length of the time domain resource of the preamble, the number of time slots included in a radio frame that can be used to send the preamble, and a The number of time slots included in the subframe that can be used to send preambles.
  • the value of b that the network device can configure for each terminal device does not exceed the maximum value of b.
  • the values of b corresponding to different types or groups of terminal devices are different, or the values of b corresponding to different terminal devices are different.
  • the maximum value of b or the value range of b may be determined according to the length of the time domain resource for sending the preamble.
  • the maximum value of b is less than the length of the time domain resource of the preamble.
  • the maximum value of b may be 2 or 1, that is, the value range of b is [0,2] or [0,1].
  • the maximum value of b may be 3 or 2 or 1. That is, the value range of b is [0,3], [0,2], or [0,1].
  • the maximum value of b or the value range of b may also be determined according to the number of time slots included in a radio frame that can be used for sending the preamble. For example, if the number of time slots available for sending the preamble included in a radio frame is 3, then the maximum value of b may be 2, that is, the value range of b is [0, 2].
  • the maximum value of b or the value range of b may also be determined according to the number of time slots included in a subframe that can be used for sending the preamble. For example, if the number of time slots available for sending the preamble included in a subframe is 2, then the maximum value of b may be 1, that is, the value range of b is [0,1].
  • the maximum value of b or the value range of b may be determined according to the length of the time domain resource of the preamble and the number of time slots included in one radio frame that can be used to send the preamble.
  • the maximum value of b is less than the length of the time domain resource of the preamble and the number of time slots available for sending the preamble included in one radio frame.
  • the length of the time domain resource of the preamble is 3 time slots
  • the number of time slots available for sending the preamble included in one radio frame is 3, then the maximum value of b may be 2. That is, the value range of b is [0,2].
  • the maximum value of b may be 1. That is, the value range of b is [0,1].
  • the aforementioned first design and second design of the RNTI aim to make the RNTI shift, so as to be able to differentiate between different terminal devices or different types of terminal devices.
  • an offset may also be designed for f_id or ul_carrier_id, so that the RNTI generates an offset. That is, the third RNTI design scheme and the fourth RNTI design scheme are as follows.
  • Design 3 design an offset for f_id, that is, the first information includes c.
  • the network device and the terminal device determine the RA-RNTI according to the offset of f_id in addition to s_id, t_id, f_id and ul_carrier_id.
  • RA-RNTI satisfies formula (4):
  • RA-RNTI 1+s_id+14 ⁇ t_id+14 ⁇ 80 ⁇ (f_id+c)+14 ⁇ 80 ⁇ 8 ⁇ ul_carrier_id (4)
  • c is the offset of f_id, and it can also be considered that 14 ⁇ 80 ⁇ c is the offset of RA-RNTI. If the sum of c and f_id is greater than or equal to 8, the RA-RNTI calculated using different carriers ul_carrier_id will be the same. Therefore, the sum of c and f_id is less than 8.
  • the values of c corresponding to different terminal devices are different, or the values of c corresponding to different types or groups of terminal devices are different. Even if different terminal devices have the same time-domain resource of the RO sending the preamble, and the same index of the frequency-domain resource of the RO, the RA-RNTIs corresponding to the ROs used by different terminal devices are also different.
  • RO-1 of terminal device 1 on BWP1 sends a preamble
  • RO-1 of terminal device 2 on BWP2 sends a preamble
  • the value of c corresponding to terminal device 1 is c1
  • the value of c corresponding to terminal device 2 is c2.
  • the s_id corresponding to RO-1 on BWP1 and the s_id corresponding to RO-1 on BWP2 are both 0, and the ul_carrier_id corresponding to RO-1 on BWP1 and the ul_carrier_id corresponding to RO-1 on BWP2 are both 0.
  • c1 is not equal to c2
  • the values of RA-RNTI 1 and RA-RNTI 2 are also different. It can be seen that since the values of c corresponding to different terminal devices are different, even if different terminal devices have the same time domain resource of the RO sending the preamble, and the index of the frequency domain resource of the RO is the same, the ROs used by different terminal devices correspond to RA-RNTI is also different. Therefore, based on the RA-RNTI determined by formula (4), terminal devices accessed by different ROs can be distinguished. Similarly, following the example in Figure 4, the values of c corresponding to different types or different groups of terminal equipment are different, and the RA-RNTI determined according to formula (4) can also distinguish different types or groups of different RO access Terminal Equipment.
  • Design 4 design an offset for ul_carrier_id, that is, the first information includes d.
  • the network device and the terminal device determine the RA-RNTI according to the offset of ul_carrier_id in addition to s_id, t_id, f_id and ul_carrier_id.
  • RA-RNTI satisfies formula (5):
  • RA-RNTI 1+s_id+14 ⁇ t_id+14 ⁇ 80 ⁇ f_id+14 ⁇ 80 ⁇ 8 ⁇ (ul_carrier_id+d) (5)
  • d can be regarded as the offset of ul_carrier_id, and 14 ⁇ 80 ⁇ 8 ⁇ ul_carrier_id can be regarded as the offset of the first RNTI. If the sum of d and ul_carrier_id is greater than or equal to 3, the calculated RA-RNTI range may exceed the maximum allowable range. Therefore, the sum of d and ul_carrier_id is less than 3.
  • the values of d corresponding to different terminal devices are different, or the values of d corresponding to different types or groups of terminal devices are different. Even if different terminal devices have the same time-domain resource of the RO sending the preamble, and the same index of the frequency-domain resource of the RO, the RA-RNTIs corresponding to the ROs used by different terminal devices are also different.
  • Formulas (2) to (5) are used to design the offset of one of the four parameters of s_id, t_id, f_id, and ul_carrier_id to make the RA-RNTI offset to distinguish terminal devices accessed on different ROs , or to distinguish between different types or groups of end devices.
  • offsets of at least two of s_id, t_id, f_id, and ul_carrier_id can be designed so that the RA-RNTI generates offsets to distinguish terminal devices. That is, the following design scheme of the fifth RA-RNTI.
  • Design five design offsets for at least two of s_id, t_id, f_id, and ul_carrier_id.
  • the network device and the terminal device determine the RA-RNTI according to at least two offsets among s_id, t_id, f_id and ul_carrier_id, and s_id, t_id, f_id and ul_carrier_id.
  • RA-RNTI satisfies formula (6):
  • RA-RNTI 1+s_id+a+14 ⁇ (t_id+b)+14 ⁇ 80 ⁇ (f_id+c)+14 ⁇ 80 ⁇ 8 ⁇ (ul_carrier_id+d) (6)
  • the value of RA-RNTI will change.
  • the terminal device and the network device can determine the RA-RNTI according to s_id, t_id, f_id and ul_carrier_id, and one or more of a, b, c and d. That is, the first information may include one or more of a, b, c and d.
  • the first information includes multiple types of a, b, c, and d
  • different terminal devices correspond to different values of at least one offset in the first information. That is, as long as the RA-RNTIs caused by the first information corresponding to different terminal devices are different.
  • the first information includes two design offsets. The two offsets are a and b. Different terminal devices correspond to the same a, but b is different; or, different terminal devices correspond to the same b, but a is different; or, different terminal devices correspond to different b, but a is different.
  • c and d are equal to 0, or c and d do not exist in the formula.
  • RA-RNTI satisfies formula (7):
  • RA-RNTI 1+(s_id+a)+14 ⁇ (t_id+b)+14 ⁇ 80 ⁇ f_id+14 ⁇ 80 ⁇ 8 ⁇ ul_carrier_id (7)
  • a and b of different terminal devices are different.
  • a terminal device 1 a terminal device 2, a terminal device 3, and a terminal device 4 exist.
  • the first information includes three design offsets.
  • the three offsets are a, b, and d. At least one of a, b, and c corresponding to different terminal devices is different. Or a, b, and d corresponding to different terminal devices are all different.
  • c 0, or c does not exist in the formula.
  • RA-RNTI satisfies formula (8):
  • RA-RNTI 1+(s_id+a)+14 ⁇ (t_id+b)+14 ⁇ 80 ⁇ f_id+14 ⁇ 80 ⁇ 8 ⁇ (ul_carrier_id+d) (8)
  • the first information includes four design offsets.
  • the four offsets are a, b, d, and d.
  • At least one of a, b, c and d corresponding to different terminal devices is different.
  • Or a, b, and d corresponding to different terminal devices are all different.
  • c 0, or c does not exist in the formula.
  • RA-RNTI satisfies formula (9):
  • RA-RNTI 1+s_id+a+14 ⁇ (t_id+b)+14 ⁇ 80 ⁇ (f_id+c)+14 ⁇ 80 ⁇ 8 ⁇ (ul_carrier_id+d) (9)
  • each terminal device may determine the RA-RNTI according to the first information and s_id, t_id, f_id, and ul_carrier_id, so as to monitor the RAR identified by the RA-RNTI of the network device in the RAR window. That is, the RAR is received according to the RA-RNTI.
  • the network device and each terminal device may determine the first information according to a preset rule, or the network device may indicate the first information of each terminal device through signaling.
  • the network device may send the first information to the terminal device.
  • the network device sends system information or configuration information including the first information to the terminal device.
  • the system information is a system information block (system information block, SIB)1.
  • SIB system information block
  • the configuration information includes random access channel configuration information or BWP configuration information.
  • the network device may multiplex random access channel configuration (RACH-config) information or BWP configuration information to indicate the first information.
  • the random access channel configuration information includes first information.
  • the corresponding relationship between the type of the terminal equipment and the configuration information of the random access channel may be defined in advance.
  • the network device may send system information, where the system information includes multiple sets of random access channel configuration information.
  • Any type of terminal device may determine its corresponding random access channel configuration information according to the correspondence between the type of terminal device and the random access channel configuration information. Therefore, the terminal device of this type determines the RA-RNTI according to the first information in the determined random access channel configuration information. If a terminal device of a certain type finds that there is no matching type in the predefined correspondence, the terminal device of this type may select corresponding random access channel configuration information according to a predefined rule.
  • the default random access channel configuration information corresponding to a certain type of terminal equipment is also applicable to another type of terminal equipment, which has the advantage of saving configuration resources and improving system efficiency.
  • the random access channel configuration information of the first type of terminal device is random access channel configuration information 1
  • the random access channel configuration information of the second type of terminal device is random access channel configuration information 2.
  • Predefinable random access channel configuration information 1 is also applicable to the third type of terminal equipment.
  • the third type of terminal device finds that there is no random access channel configuration information matching itself according to the correspondence between the type of the terminal device and the random access channel configuration information, then the third type of terminal device may select the random access channel configuration information 1 .
  • the first information is carried in the BWP configuration information.
  • the BWP configuration information of different types of terminal devices includes different first information. For example, there are a first type of terminal device and a second type of terminal device.
  • the network device configures BWP configuration information 1 for the first type of terminal device, and the network device configures BWP configuration information 2 for the second type of terminal device.
  • BWP configuration information 1 includes a
  • BWP configuration information 2 includes b.
  • the first type of terminal equipment determines the RA-RNTI according to a in the BWP configuration information 1.
  • the second type of terminal equipment determines the RA-RNTI according to b in the BWP configuration information 2.
  • different BWP configuration information of the same type of terminal equipment includes different first information.
  • terminal device 1 and terminal device 2 are the same type of terminal device.
  • the network device configures BWP configuration information 1 for terminal device 1, and the network device configures BWP configuration information 2 for terminal device 2.
  • BWP configuration information 1 includes a
  • BWP configuration information 2 includes b.
  • Terminal device 1 determines the RA-RNTI according to a in BWP configuration information 1.
  • the terminal device 2 determines the RA-RNTI according to b in the BWP configuration information 2 .
  • the BWP configuration information of different types of terminal devices includes the same first information, but the values of the first information corresponding to different types of terminal devices are different.
  • the BWP configuration information 1 configured by the network device for the first type of terminal device includes a
  • the first type of terminal equipment determines the RA-RNTI according to a in the BWP configuration information 1.
  • the second type of terminal equipment determines the RA-RNTI according to a in the BWP configuration information 2.
  • the terminal device and the network device may determine the first information according to a preset rule.
  • the correspondence between the first information and the BWP ID can be predefined.
  • the correspondence between the first information and the size of the BWP may be predefined.
  • the first threshold is 20MHz.
  • the first information is related to at least one of the following characteristic parameters: type of terminal device, capability of terminal device, complexity of terminal device, bandwidth of terminal device, number of antennas of terminal device, transmission type of message 3, data transmission type, slice capability indication, BWP configuration information, mission critical communication, power saving requirements, and delay requirements, etc.
  • characteristic parameters include type of terminal device, capability of terminal device, complexity of terminal device, bandwidth of terminal device, number of antennas of terminal device, transmission type of message 3, data transmission type, slice capability indication, BWP configuration information, mission critical communication, power saving requirements, and delay requirements, etc.
  • Types of terminal devices including, for example, eMBB terminal devices, non-eMBB terminal devices, ultra-reliable low-latency communication (ultra-reliable low-latency communication, URLLC) terminal devices, low-complexity terminal devices, and non-low-complexity terminals equipment, CE terminal equipment, SDT terminal equipment, power saving terminal equipment, sidelink terminal equipment, non-terrestrial communication terminal equipment, private network terminal equipment or RAN slicing terminal equipment, etc.
  • eMBB terminal devices including, for example, eMBB terminal devices, non-eMBB terminal devices, ultra-reliable low-latency communication (ultra-reliable low-latency communication, URLLC) terminal devices, low-complexity terminal devices, and non-low-complexity terminals equipment, CE terminal equipment, SDT terminal equipment, power saving terminal equipment, sidelink terminal equipment, non-terrestrial communication terminal equipment, private network terminal equipment or RAN slicing terminal equipment, etc.
  • URLLC ultra-reliable low-latency communication
  • the capability of the terminal device can also be regarded as capability information of the terminal device, which is used to indicate the capability of the terminal device.
  • the capabilities of the terminal device may include coverage enhanced transmission, uplink coverage enhanced transmission, downlink coverage enhanced transmission, small data transmission, low spectrum efficiency modulation and coding mode table, uplink low spectrum efficiency modulation and coding mode table, downlink low spectrum efficiency modulation and coding mode table, new channel status indication table, terminal equipment processing time, BWP tuning, BWP external frequency hopping, BWP external measurement, and the maximum number of multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) layers supported by the physical downlink shared channel at least one of .
  • the terminal device processing time is at least one of terminal device processing time capability 1 and terminal device processing time capability 2 .
  • BWP tuning such that only BWP position changes.
  • the BWP position is at least one of a BWP start resource position, a BWP start resource block (resource block, RB) indication, and a BWP center frequency point.
  • frequency hopping outside the BWP means that the frequency hopping interval between at least two hops of the frequency hopping transmission exceeds the BWP bandwidth, or at least one hop of the frequency hopping transmission is outside the BWP.
  • the measurement outside the BWP means that the channel state measurement is outside the BWP, or the mobility measurement is outside the BWP, or the time-frequency synchronization measurement is outside the BWP, or the synchronization signal module is received outside the BWP.
  • the bandwidth of the terminal device is at least one of the maximum channel bandwidth of the terminal device, the maximum transmission bandwidth of the terminal device, the radio frequency bandwidth of the terminal device, and the baseband bandwidth of the terminal device.
  • the number of antennas of the terminal device is at least one of the number of receiving antennas of the terminal device and the number of transmitting antennas of the terminal device.
  • the transmission type of message 3 including repeated transmission or non-repeated transmission.
  • the transmission type of the data that is, the transmission type of the data to be sent by the terminal device, may include repeated transmission or non-repeated transmission.
  • the slicing capability indication may indicate whether the terminal device has a slicing function.
  • the BWP configuration information is at least one of a BWP identifier (identifier, ID) configured on the terminal device and a BWP size.
  • the size of the BWP is the length of the frequency domain resource of the BWP, the frequency domain width of the BWP, the number of resources included in the BWP, or the number of RBs included in the BWP.
  • the characteristic parameters of different terminal devices may be the same or different.
  • the first information associated with terminal devices with different characteristic parameters may be the same or different.
  • the first information associated with terminal devices having the same characteristic parameter may be the same or different. The following describes the relationship between the first information and one or more of the above characteristic parameters.
  • the characteristic parameter is one or more of the following: the type of the terminal device, the capability of the terminal device, the complexity of the terminal device, the bandwidth of the terminal device, the number of antennas of the terminal device, the number of message 3 to be sent by the terminal device
  • the transmission type, the transmission type of the data to be sent by the terminal device, the transmission type of the data to be sent by the terminal device, the slicing capability indication of the terminal device, the BWP size, and the BWP ID the first information can be a, b, c or d , as long as a, b, c or d is enough to distinguish different terminal devices or different types of terminal devices.
  • the feature parameter sets associated with different first information are different.
  • the feature parameter set contains one or more feature parameters.
  • the terminal device 1 is a low-complexity terminal device
  • the terminal device 2 is a non-low-complexity terminal device.
  • the first information associated with terminal device 1 may be a
  • the first information associated with terminal device 2 may be b.
  • Values of the first information associated with different characteristic parameters may be different.
  • the terminal device 1 is a low-complexity terminal device
  • the terminal device 2 is a non-low-complexity terminal device.
  • the first information is a.
  • the value of a associated with terminal device 1 may be a1, and the value of a associated with terminal device 2 may be a2.
  • a1 is not equal to a2, and both a1 and a2 are integers.
  • values of the first information associated with different terminal devices are different.
  • the first information is b.
  • the value of b associated with terminal device 1 may be b1, and the value of b associated with terminal device 2 may be b2.
  • b1 is not equal to b2, and both b1 and b2 are integers.
  • the network device can determine the first information according to at least one characteristic parameter of the terminal device, and configure the determined first information for the terminal device.
  • the four terminal devices include terminal device 1, terminal device 2, terminal device 3, and terminal device 4.
  • terminal device 1 and terminal device 2 are both legacy terminal devices
  • terminal device 3 and terminal device 4 are both REDCAP terminal devices. That is, terminal device 1 and terminal device 2 belong to the same type of terminal device, and terminal device 3 and terminal device 4 belong to the same type of terminal device.
  • the network device may configure two sets of random access configuration information. Each set of random access configuration information includes different first information.
  • the first set of random access configuration information is used to determine the RA-RNTI of terminal device 1 and terminal device 2 .
  • the second set of random access configuration information is used to determine the RA-RNTI of the terminal device 3 and the terminal device 4 .
  • the first set of random access configuration information does not include a;
  • the RA-RNTI is associated with at least one characteristic parameter of the terminal device.
  • an offset is designed for one or more of s_id, t_id, f_id, and ul_carrier_id, so that the RA-RNTI or MSGB-RNTI generates an offset.
  • Different terminal devices or different types of terminal devices have different offsets, so that different terminal devices or different types of terminal devices can be distinguished.
  • the following introduces the second solution provided by the embodiment of the present application, that is, the design of RA-RNTI or MGSB-RNTI in the prior art is followed, but the starting positions of the RAR windows corresponding to different terminal devices are different. Even if different terminal devices send preamble ROs with the same time domain resources and the RO frequency domain resource indexes are the same, different terminal devices send preamble ROs corresponding to different RA-RNTIs or MGSB-RNTIs. Therefore, in solution two, different terminal devices can be distinguished through the starting position of the RAR window, and different types of terminal devices can also be distinguished.
  • the RA-RNTI is used as an example below, and the MSGB-RNTI is similar, so details are not repeated here.
  • FIG. 8 is a flowchart of a random access method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • this method is applied to the communication system shown in FIG. 5 .
  • the method may be performed by two communication devices, such as a first communication device and a second communication device.
  • the method is executed by a network device and a terminal device as an example, that is, the first communication device is a terminal device, and the second communication device is a network device as an example.
  • the random access method shown in FIG. 8 is a 4-step random access method, that is, the RNTI involved in the embodiment shown in FIG. 8 is RA-RNTI.
  • the 4-step random access method is taken as an example in FIG. 8 , but it is also applicable to the 2-step random access process.
  • the flow of the random access method shown in FIG. 8 is described as follows.
  • the terminal device sends a preamble to the network device at the RO.
  • S801 is the same as S501 described above, and will not be repeated here.
  • the network device determines the RA-RNTI, and scrambles the RAR message based on the RA-RNTI.
  • the difference from S502 is that the network device can determine the RA-RNTI according to formula (1). That is, the network device may determine the RA-RNTI in the manner of calculating the RA-RNTI in the prior art.
  • the network device determines the initial position of the RAR window, and sends a RAR message to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device determines the starting position of the RAR window according to the second information, and receives the RAR message from the network device.
  • the second information may be used to indicate the offset of the starting position of the RAR window.
  • the unit of the offset can be ms, symbol, time slot, subframe or cycle of the search space.
  • the starting position of the RAR window is the first symbol of the first control resource set (control resource set, CORESET) after 1 symbol after the last symbol of the PRACH. That is to say, the starting position of the RAR window can be understood as the position of the starting resource in the time domain, the index of the first symbol of the RAR window, the index of the first slot of the RAR window, and the first subframe of the RAR window index or the index of the first mini-slot of the RAR window.
  • the offset granularity of the starting position of the RAR window may be a symbol, or a time slot, or the like.
  • the offset of the starting position of the RAR window may include but not limited to the following three.
  • the starting position of the RAR window may be the first symbol of the first CORESET after M1 symbols after the last symbol of the PRACH.
  • M1 is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and is used to indicate the offset of the starting position of the RAR window.
  • the starting position of the RAR window is shifted by M1-1 symbols.
  • the second information may include M1, which may indirectly indicate the number of symbols offset by the start position of the RAR window, that is, M1-1.
  • the starting position of the RAR window may be the first symbol of the first CORESET after M2 symbols after the last symbol of the RPACH.
  • the difference from Example 1 is that in this example, the offset of the starting position of the RAR window takes a time slot as the granularity.
  • the second information may include M2, which indirectly indicates the number of time slots offset by the start position of the RAR window, that is, (M2-1)/14.
  • the second information may indicate offset_s, which directly indicates the number of time slots offset by the start position of the RAR window, that is, offset_s.
  • the starting position of the RAR window may be the first symbol of the M3-th CORESET one symbol after the last symbol of the RPACH.
  • M3 is an integer greater than 1, and is used to indicate the offset of the starting position of the RAR window.
  • the difference from Example 1 and Example 2 is that in this example, the starting position of the RAR window is shifted by M3-1 CORESETs.
  • the second information may include M3, which may indirectly indicate the number of CORESETs offset by the start position of the RAR window, that is, M3-1.
  • the starting positions of the RAR windows of different terminal devices may be different, and thus the time domain ranges of the RAR windows of different terminal devices may be different.
  • the time domain range of the RAR window is determined according to the starting position of the RAR window and the length of the RAR window.
  • the length of the RAR window is the time occupied in the RAR window, such as 10ms. It should be noted that different time domain ranges of different RAR windows mean that different RAR windows do not overlap in time domain. It is also believed that, if the time domain ranges of two RAR windows overlap, then the two RAR windows are the same RAR window.
  • the time domain ranges of the RAR windows are different, even if the RA-RNTI calculated by different terminal devices is the same, they can also distinguish their own RARs, which can avoid random access resource conflicts, thereby improving communication efficiency.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of two groups of RO and RAR windows.
  • BWP1 is the initial uplink BWP of terminal device 1
  • BWP2 is the initial uplink BWP of terminal device 2 .
  • Figure 9 includes two groups of ROs, referred to as a first group RO and a second group RO.
  • the first group of ROs includes 4 ROs on BWP1 and 4 ROs on BWP2, and the second group of ROs also includes 4 ROs on BWP1 and 4 ROs on BWP2.
  • the difference lies in that the time domain resources of the two groups of ROs are different.
  • the value range of t_id corresponding to the first group of ROs is 0-9, and the value range of t_id corresponding to the second group of ROs is 10-19.
  • RAR1-1 is the RAR corresponding to the terminal device 1 sending the preamble on the first group of ROs
  • RAR1-2 is the RAR corresponding to the terminal device 1 sending the preamble on the second group of ROs.
  • RAR2-1 is the RAR corresponding to the terminal device 2 sending the preamble on the first group of ROs
  • RAR2-2 is the RAR corresponding to the terminal device 2 sending the preamble on the second group of ROs.
  • RO-1 of terminal device 1 in the first group of ROs on BWP1 sends a preamble
  • terminal device 2 sends a preamble in RO-1 of the first group of ROs on BWP2.
  • the time domain resources of RO-1 on BWP1 and RO-1 on BWP2 are the same.
  • the initial positions of the RAR windows of the terminal device 1 and the terminal device 2 are the same.
  • the frequency domain resource indexes of RO-1 on BWP1 and RO-1 on BWP2 are also the same, according to the design of RA-RNTI in the prior art, the RA-RNTI of terminal device 1 and terminal device 2 are the same.
  • the starting positions of the RAR windows of terminal device 1 and terminal device 2 are the same, and the RA-RNTI of terminal device 1 and terminal device 2 are also the same, and the terminal devices cannot be distinguished 1 and terminal device 2.
  • the starting positions of the RAR windows corresponding to terminal device 1 and terminal device 2 may be different, and thus the time domain ranges of the RAR windows may be different.
  • the time domain range of the RAR window corresponding to the first group of ROs of the terminal device 1 is time slots 10-19.
  • the time domain range of the RAR window corresponding to the first group of ROs of the terminal device 2 is 20-29.
  • the time domain range of the RAR window corresponding to the second group of ROs of the terminal device 1 is time slots 20-29.
  • the value ranges of RA-RNTI corresponding to different terminal devices in the same RAR window can be different, and the value range of RA-RNTI can be used to Different end devices can also be distinguished.
  • the value range of RA-RNTI can be used to Different end devices can also be distinguished. For example, assume that RO-1 in the first group of ROs of terminal device 1 on BWP1 sends a preamble, and RO-1 in the first group of ROs of terminal device 2 on BWP2 sends a preamble.
  • terminal device 1 and terminal device 2 cannot be distinguished.
  • the RAR window of the terminal device 2 can be offset.
  • moving the RAR window (that is, RAR1-1) of terminal device 2 to RAR2-1 is equivalent to the RAR corresponding to the preamble sent by the second group of ROs of terminal device 1 on BWP1.
  • RAR2-1 the RAR window corresponding to the terminal device 2 sending the preamble in the first group of ROs. That is, by offsetting the RAR window of the terminal device 1, the RAR window of the terminal device 1 and the RAR window of the terminal device 2 are made the same.
  • the value range of t_id corresponding to RAR1-2 is 10 ⁇ 19
  • the value range of t_id corresponding to RAR2-1 is 0 ⁇ 9
  • the value range of RA-RNTI corresponding to terminal device 1 corresponds to that of terminal device 2
  • the value range of the RA-RNTI is different. That is, the embodiment of the present application can enable different terminal devices to have different RA-RNTI value ranges in the same RAR window, and different terminal devices can also be distinguished through the value range of RA-RNTI, thereby avoiding random access Resource conflicts, thereby improving communication efficiency.
  • each terminal device After sending the preamble, each terminal device can determine the start position of the RAR window according to the first symbol of the first CORESET one symbol after the last symbol of the PRACH and the second information.
  • the network device and each terminal device may determine the second information according to a preset rule, or the network device may indicate the second information of each terminal device through signaling.
  • the network device sends system information or configuration information including the first information to the terminal device.
  • the system information may be a system information block (SIB)1.
  • the configuration information may include random access channel configuration information or BWP configuration information.
  • the network device may multiplex random access channel configuration information or BWP configuration information to indicate the second information.
  • scheme two may be combined with scheme one.
  • the network device sends the first information and the second information to each terminal device.
  • the first information and the second information may be carried in the same signaling, for example, both the first information and the second information are carried in SIB1.
  • the first information and the second information may also be carried in different signaling.
  • the first information is carried in BWP configuration information
  • the second information is carried in random access channel configuration information. Take the example that both the first information and the second information are carried in SIB1.
  • the second information is used to indicate the offset of the RAR window.
  • terminal device 1 , terminal device 2 , terminal device 3 , and terminal device 4 exist.
  • the network device sends SIB1 to each terminal device, where the SIB1 includes the first information and the second information.
  • SIB1 includes the first information and the second information.
  • the offsets of the RAR windows corresponding to terminal device 1 and terminal device 2 are the same, the a corresponding to terminal device 1 and terminal device 2 are different. Therefore, according to the design of RA-RNTI in scheme 1, terminal device 1 and terminal device can be distinguished 2.
  • the RAR window offsets corresponding to the terminal device 2 and the terminal device 4 are different. According to the design of the starting position of the RAR window in scheme 2, the terminal device 2 and the terminal device 4 can also be distinguished, thereby avoiding random access conflicts, that is, avoiding random access failures.
  • Solution 3 provided by the embodiment of the present application is introduced below.
  • the network device is configured to send preamble time-frequency resource information, so as to increase more available values of RNTI, so as to distinguish more types or groups of terminal devices.
  • the network device will configure the time-frequency resource for sending the preamble and some related parameters for the terminal device.
  • the network device can be configured with a PRACH configuration index (configuration index), and different PRACH configuration indexes correspond to different time-frequency resources for sending the preamble.
  • configuration index a PRACH configuration index
  • Table 1 is a configuration table of time-frequency resources used for sending preambles. It should be noted that Table 1 only lists some configurations of time-frequency resources for sending the preamble, as an illustration.
  • the network device can configure the random access preamble format (preamble format), the subframe number for sending the preamble (subframe number), the starting symbol for sending the preamble (starting symbol), and the subframe
  • the number of PRACH slots in a subframe (number of PRACH slots with in a subframe), the number of time-domain PRACH times N t RA, slot (number of time-domain PRACH occasions within a PRACH slot), and the PRACH cycle N dur RA (PRACH duration) and so on.
  • the idle value of RA-RNTI can be considered as an unused RA-RNTI.
  • the RA-RNTI is calculated according to the aforementioned formula (1-1). Taking a radio frame including 80 time slots as an example, if the SCS is 15 kHz, a radio frame includes 10 time slots. If all 10 slots are allocated, then there are 70 idle values of RA-RNTI. If only 5 slots are allocated in 10 slots for sending preamble, then there are 5 idle values of RA-RNTI in these 10 slots, then these 5 idle values of RA-RNTI can also be used to distinguish terminals equipment. Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, the time-frequency resource information used for sending the preamble may be configured so that the RA-RNTI has more idle values, so that the idle values are used to distinguish terminal devices.
  • the network device may be configured to send one or more types of time-frequency resource information of the preamble as follows.
  • the network device configures the length of the time domain resource of the preamble.
  • the length of the time domain resource configured by the network device in the preamble is greater than or equal to N dur , where N dur is an integer greater than 2.
  • the unit of the length of the time domain resource of the preamble may be a symbol or a time slot.
  • the network device may configure the length of the time domain resource of the preamble to be greater than or equal to 2 symbols, or greater than or equal to 2 time slots.
  • the minimum length of the predefined time-domain resource for sending the preamble is N dur , where N dur is an integer greater than 2; or, the predefined length of the time-domain resource for sending the preamble A candidate set, the value of any element in the candidate set is greater than N dur , and the N dur is an integer greater than 2, and the network device determines the length of the time domain resource used to send the preamble according to the candidate set.
  • the s_id used for calculating the RA-RNTI is the first symbol in the symbols occupied by the time domain resource for sending the preamble. Then, the remaining symbols except the first symbol in the symbols occupied by the time domain resources for sending the preamble are not used for calculating the RA-RNTI. In this embodiment of the present application, the remaining symbols can be used to calculate the RA-RNTI of other terminal devices. It can be seen that the idle value of RA-RNTI can be increased by configuring the minimum length of preamble time domain resources, that is, configuring longer time domain resources for sending preambles can be used to allocate to different terminal devices to avoid random access into a resource conflict.
  • the network device sends the first information to the terminal device according to the length of the time domain resource of the preamble.
  • Take the first information is a as an example.
  • the length of the time domain resource of the preamble is greater than or equal to N, and the maximum value of a is N, that is, the value range of a is [0, N-1], which can be used to distinguish N groups or N types of terminal devices.
  • there are a first type of terminal device and a second type of terminal device and the s_id, t_id, f_id, and ul_carrier_id of the first type of terminal device and the second type of terminal device calculating the RA-RNTI are the same.
  • the network device may send first information to a terminal device of the first type, where the first information includes a1; and the network device sends first information to a terminal device of the second type, where the first information includes a2.
  • a1 and a2 are two values in [0, N-1].
  • the first type of terminal equipment the first information from the network equipment is received, and the RA-RNTI 1 can be determined according to a1, s_id, t_id, f_id and ul_carrier_id.
  • the second type of terminal device receives the first information from the network device, and can determine the RA-RNTI 2 according to a2, s_id, t_id, f_id and ul_carrier_id.
  • RA-RNTI 1 and RA-RNTI 2 are different, so that the first type of terminal equipment and the second type of terminal equipment can be distinguished. That is, the first type of terminal equipment can receive the RAR identified by RA-RNTI 1 according to RA-RNTI 1, and the second type of terminal equipment can receive the RAR identified by RA-RNTI 2 according to RA-RNTI 2.
  • the length of the time domain resource of the preamble is equal to 2 symbols. If the network device is configured to send the preamble start symbol as symbol 0, then terminal device 1 occupies symbol 0 and symbol 1 to send the preamble. When terminal device 1 calculates the RA-RNTI, s_id is 0. But symbol 1 is not used to calculate RA-RNTI. Therefore, symbol 1 can be used by terminal device 2 to calculate RA-RNTI. That is, the length of the time domain resource of the preamble is equal to 2 symbols, which can distinguish two groups or two types of terminal devices. Similarly, if the length of the time domain resource of the preamble is equal to 4 symbols, it can be used to distinguish 4 groups or 4 types of terminal equipment.
  • the existing protocol defines that when the number of symbols occupied by the preamble time domain resources is 2, the value range of the PRACH configuration index is 87 ⁇ 116, 177 ⁇ 197, 219 ⁇ 235, 67 ⁇ 86, 133 ⁇ 144, 169 ⁇ 188, 211 ⁇ 255, 0 ⁇ 28, 89 ⁇ 111, 144 ⁇ 172, 202 ⁇ 219.
  • the number of symbols in the time domain resource configured with the preamble is greater than 2.
  • the network device does not configure the PRACH configuration index to be any value in the above multiple value ranges. It can also be considered that the terminal device does not expect the network device to configure the PRACH configuration index to be any value in the above multiple value ranges.
  • the network device configures the number of subframes included in a wireless frame that can be used to send the preamble. For example, the network device configures that the number of subframes available for sending the preamble included in a wireless frame is less than or equal to P, where P is an integer less than 10.
  • the maximum value of the number of subframes predefined for sending the preamble is P, and P is an integer less than 10; or, a candidate set of the number of subframes used for sending the preamble is predefined, and the candidate set The value of any element in is greater than P, and P is an integer less than 10, and the network device determines the number of subframes for sending the preamble according to the candidate set.
  • a radio frame includes 10 subframes, and P subframes in the 10 subframes are used to send the PRACH, then the remaining 10-P subframes are not used to send the PRACH. It can be considered that 10-P subframes are not used to calculate RA-RNTI. Actually, 10-P subframes can be used to calculate RA-RNTI. Therefore, the smaller P is, the more subframes are not used to calculate the RA-RNTI, and the more idle values of the RA-RNTI are calculated using one radio frame. For example, in Table 1, when the PRACH configuration index is 105, the subframe numbers are 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, that is, the number of subframes used to send the PRACH is 5.
  • the remaining 5 subframes are not used to calculate the RA-RNTI, and the RA-RNTI calculated in the remaining 5 subframes can be used to distinguish more terminal devices.
  • the network device may configure that the number of subframes available for sending preamble included in a radio frame is less than P, so as to increase the idle value of RA-RNTI, so as to distinguish more different terminal devices.
  • the network device configures the number of time slots included in a subframe that can be used to send the preamble. For example, the network device configures that the number of time slots available for sending preambles included in a subframe is less than or equal to N, where N is an integer less than 2 ⁇ , and ⁇ is a subcarrier spacing SCS parameter.
  • the maximum number of time slots that can be used to send preambles included in a pre-defined subframe is N, where N is an integer less than 2 ⁇ , and ⁇ is the subcarrier spacing SCS parameter; or, a pre-defined sub-frame
  • N is an integer less than 2 ⁇
  • ⁇ is the subcarrier spacing SCS parameter
  • the network device determines a The number of time slots included in the subframe that can be used to send preambles.
  • the RA-RNTI calculated in a radio frame can reserve more idle values to distinguish more different terminal devices.
  • the PRACH configuration index in Table 1 is 98, and the number of PRACH time slots in a subframe is 1, that is, the number of time slots used to transmit PRACH in a subframe is 1.
  • the PRACH configuration index in Table 1 is 102, and the number of PRACH time slots in a subframe is 2, that is, the number of time slots used to transmit PRACH in a subframe is 2.
  • different terminal devices may also be distinguished according to the method of scheme 1. That is, different first information corresponds to different types of terminal devices or different characteristics, so that the RA-RNTI generates an offset to distinguish terminal devices.
  • the network device configures the number of time slots included in a wireless frame that can be used to send the preamble.
  • the maximum number of time slots that can be used to send a preamble included in a wireless frame is predefined; or, a candidate set of the number of time slots that can be used to send a preamble included in a wireless frame is predefined, and the network device according to The candidate set determines the number of time slots included in a radio frame that can be used for sending preambles.
  • the PRACH configuration index in Table 1 is 98
  • the subframe number is 4, the number of subframes used to transmit RACH in a radio frame is 1; the number of PRACH time slots in a subframe is 1, that is, the number of subframes used to transmit The number of time slots of the PRACH is 1, and the number of time slots used to transmit the PRACH in one radio frame is 1.
  • the network device configures that the number of time slots available for sending preamble included in a wireless frame is less than 80.
  • the SCS is equal to 60kHz, and the number of time slots available for sending preamble included in one wireless frame configured by the network device is less than 40.
  • the SCS is equal to 30kHz, and the number of time slots available for sending preamble included in a wireless frame configured by the network device is less than 20.
  • the SCS is equal to 15kHz, and the number of time slots available for sending preamble included in a wireless frame configured by the network device is less than 10.
  • scheme three may be combined with scheme one.
  • the configuration of scheme three can be used to distinguish different types or different characteristics or different groups of terminal devices.
  • different terminal devices belonging to the same type (group) can be distinguished.
  • any one of 1)-4) in scheme three can be combined with any one of 2)-6) in scheme one.
  • using 1) in Scheme 3 it is assumed that the length of the time-domain resource configured by the network device for the preamble is equal to 4, and different terminal devices can be distinguished by any formula in formula (3)-formula (6).
  • the network device may send random access channel configuration information and the first information to the terminal device.
  • the random access channel configuration information and the first information may be carried in the same signaling, or may be carried in different signalings.
  • the random access channel configuration information may be configured to send one or more time domain resources in 1)-4) above for preamble.
  • the time domain resources for different terminal devices to send the preamble may be the same or different.
  • the first information corresponding to different terminal devices is different, so as to distinguish different terminal devices, reduce or avoid random access conflicts, and reduce the failure rate of random access.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of a used by three terminal devices.
  • the three terminal devices are terminal device 1 , terminal device 2 and terminal device 3 .
  • the length of the preamble time domain resource of terminal device 1 is 2, the length of the preamble time domain resource of terminal device 2 is 4, and the length of the preamble time domain resource of terminal device 3 is 4.
  • the a corresponding to the terminal device 1 is 0, the a corresponding to the terminal device 2 is 1, and the a corresponding to the terminal device 3 is 3.
  • the preamble time domain resource lengths of terminal device 1 and terminal device 2 (or terminal device 3 ) are different, so terminal device 1 and terminal device 2 (or terminal device 3 ) can be distinguished.
  • the lengths of the preamble time domain resources of the terminal device 2 and the terminal device 3 are the same, the values of a corresponding to the terminal device 2 and the terminal device 3 are different, so the terminal device 2 and the terminal device 3 can be distinguished.
  • option three can be combined with option two.
  • the configuration of scheme three can be used to distinguish different types or different characteristics or different groups of terminal devices.
  • different terminal devices belonging to the same type (group) can be distinguished.
  • any one of 1)-4) in scheme three can be combined with scheme two.
  • the network device may send random access channel configuration information and the second information to the terminal device.
  • the random access channel configuration information and the second information may be carried in the same signaling, or may be carried in different signalings.
  • the random access channel configuration information may be configured to send one or more time domain resources in 1)-4) above for preamble.
  • the time domain resources for different terminal devices to send the preamble may be the same or different.
  • the second information corresponding to different terminal devices is different, so that different terminal devices can be distinguished.
  • terminal device 1 , terminal device 2 , terminal device 3 , and terminal device 4 exist. Take the random access channel configuration information including the second information as an example.
  • the network device may send random access channel configuration information to the four terminal devices respectively.
  • the random access channel configuration information of the terminal device 1 may indicate that a radio frame includes 1 subframe, the subframe number is 1, and the offset of the RAR window is 1 time slot.
  • the random access channel configuration information of the terminal device 2 may indicate that a radio frame includes 1 subframe, the subframe number is 7, and the offset of the RAR window is 1 time slot.
  • the random access channel configuration information of the terminal device 3 may indicate that a radio frame includes 1 subframe, the subframe number is 1, and the offset of the RAR window is 2 time slots.
  • the random access channel configuration information of the terminal device 4 indicates that a radio frame includes 1 subframe, the subframe number is 7, and the offset of the RAR window is 2 time slots.
  • the number of subframes included in a radio frame indicated by the random access channel configuration information of terminal device 1 and terminal device 2 is the same, and the offset of the RAR window is the same, the subframe numbers of terminal device 1 and terminal device 2 are different, so The terminal device 1 and the terminal device 2 can be distinguished by the subframe number. Similarly, terminal device 1 and terminal device 3 can be distinguished through the offset of the RAR window.
  • scheme 1, scheme 2 and scheme 3 may also be combined to distinguish more types or groups of terminal devices.
  • the configuration of solution three can be used to distinguish different types or different characteristics or different groups of terminal devices.
  • terminal devices with different characteristic parameters belonging to the same type (group) can be further distinguished.
  • different terminal devices can be further distinguished. It is similar to the above-mentioned combination of scheme three and scheme one or scheme two, and will not be repeated here.
  • the time domain resources configured for the terminal devices for sending the preamble will be more sparse, so as to increase more idle values of RA-RNTI.
  • a wireless frame configured by the network device includes a small number of subframes that can be used to send the preamble.
  • a wireless frame configured by the network device includes a relatively small number of time slots available for sending the preamble.
  • a subframe configured by the network device includes a relatively small number of time slots available for sending the preamble.
  • the RA-RNTI has more idle values, the time domain resources used to send the preamble are relatively sparse, resulting in fewer POs in the same time period, which will increase the delay of random access. That is, the RA-RNTI exceeds the maximum allowable range. For example, there are 10 terminal devices, and the length of the time domain resource for each terminal device to send the preamble is 4 symbols. If a terminal device among the 10 terminal devices fails in random access, the terminal device needs to wait at least 10 ⁇ 4 symbols before performing random access again.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides solution 4.
  • the random access delay is reduced by configuring the number of types of terminal devices that send the random access preamble in the RO corresponding to the same RNTI.
  • the maximum number of types of terminal devices that send the random access preamble in the RO corresponding to the same RNTI may be predefined as N, where N is a positive integer.
  • the network device may configure that the number of terminal device types that send the random access preamble in the RO corresponding to the same RNTI is less than or equal to Q. While distinguishing different types of terminal equipment, the random access delay is minimized.
  • each type of terminal equipment sends a preamble time-domain resource with a length of 4 symbols.
  • the network device configures the type of the terminal device that sends the random access preamble in the RO corresponding to the same RNTI as 4. If a certain type of terminal equipment among the four types of terminal equipment fails to perform random access, then this type of terminal equipment performs random access again, after 4 ⁇ 4 symbols, compared to after 10 ⁇ 4 symbols, The random access delay is reduced.
  • the network device may also configure the combined numbers of different types of terminal devices that send random access preambles in the RO corresponding to the same RNTI.
  • Different types of terminal equipment can be characterized by the characteristic parameters of the terminal equipment.
  • the combination of different types of terminal equipment there are ⁇ low-complexity UE, non-low-complexity UE ⁇ , ⁇ 4-step RACH, 2-step RACH ⁇ , ⁇ SDT, non-SDT ⁇ , ⁇ CE, non-CE ⁇ , ⁇ 1 Antenna, 2 antenna ⁇ , ⁇ RAN slicing, non-RAN slicing ⁇ etc.
  • the number of combinations of terminal devices of different types predefined by the protocol or configurable by the network device is less than or equal to S.
  • S may be an integer greater than 1, for example, S is equal to 2.
  • the combination number of different types of terminal devices is 2.
  • the combination of different types of terminal equipment includes ⁇ CE, non-CE ⁇ , ⁇ 1 antenna, 2 antennas ⁇ , which is equivalent to having 4 types of terminal equipment. That is, the characteristic parameters of the first type of terminal equipment include CE and 1 antenna, the characteristic parameters of the second type of terminal equipment include CE and 2 antennas, the characteristic parameters of the third type of terminal equipment include non-CE and 1 antenna, and the fourth type of terminal equipment Characteristic parameters include non-CE and 2 antennas. It is equivalent to that the network device configures the terminal device type equal to 4 to send the random access preamble in the RO corresponding to the same RNTI.
  • the fourth scheme can also be combined with the first scheme, the second scheme or the third scheme.
  • the maximum value of the number of types of characteristic parameters associated with the first information can be limited to 2, so as to prevent the RA-RNTI determined according to the first information from exceeding the maximum allowable range of RA-RNTI .
  • the number of types of characteristic parameters associated with the first information may be defined by the protocol or configured by the network device.
  • the following introduces the fifth solution provided by the embodiment of the present application, that is, using the position of the extension field or the fallback indication field in the MAC PDU to distinguish different types of terminal devices.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of a random access process.
  • the terminal device sends a preamble to the network device on the RO.
  • the RAR sent by the network device to the terminal device may include a PDCCH and a PDSCH, and the PDCCH is used to schedule the PDSCH.
  • the DCI is carried in the PDCCH.
  • PDSCH includes MAC PDU for carrying RAR.
  • a MAC PDU may include one or more sub PDUs (also known as MAC sub PDUs) and a padding field.
  • Figure 11 takes a MAC PDU including n sub PDUs as an example.
  • Each sub PDU included in the MAC PDU includes a subheader.
  • the subheader includes E field, backoff indication (backoff indication, BI) field, Type field (referred to as T field), reserved (reserved, R) field and random access preamble (random access preamble, RAP) identifier (identifier, ID) One or more of field and MAC RAR.
  • the E field is used to indicate whether there are sub PDUs following this sub PDU. It should be understood that the value of the E field in the last sub PDU is "0", indicating that there is no sub PDU after this sub PDU.
  • the value of the E field in the last sub PDU of the MAC PDU is 0, and the value of the E field in the remaining sub PDUs except the last sub PDU is 1. That is, in the existing protocol, only one sub PDU in the MAC PDU has a value of 0 in the E field.
  • the BI field is used to indicate an overload condition in an identified cell.
  • the T field is a flag indicating whether the MAC subheader contains a RAP ID or a backoff indicator.
  • the T field being "0" is used to indicate that the corresponding subheader includes a BI field, and the BI field is used to indicate the overload condition of the cell. If there is BI, the T field included in the first subPDU must be "0".
  • the T field is "1" to indicate that the subheader includes RAP ID, or indicates that the subheader includes RAP ID and MAC RAR.
  • Subheader includes the broadcast information request (SI request) that RAP ID can indicate confirmation. The content of the RAP ID corresponds to the preamble index when the terminal device initiates random access.
  • SI request broadcast information request
  • the RAR corresponding to the preamble index is used to respond to the broadcast information request, then there is no MAC RAR after the RAP ID. If the RAR corresponding to the preamble index is used to respond to the random access request, then there is a MAC RAR after the RAP ID.
  • sub PDU can include three types.
  • Figure 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a MAC PDU.
  • Figure 12 takes sub PDU1, sub PDU2, and sub PDU3 included in the MAC PDU as an example. That is, sub PDU1 includes E field, T field, R field and BI field.
  • sub PDU2 includes E field, T field and RAP ID field.
  • sub PDU3 includes E field, T field, RAP ID field and MAC RAR.
  • the value of the E field in the last sub PDU of the MAC PDU is 0, and the value of the E field in the remaining sub PDUs except the last sub PDU is 1.
  • at least one of the multiple subPDUs included in the MAC PDU includes an E field of "0", so that different terminal devices are identified by the E field of "0" in at least one subPDU. That is, the E field in the sub PDU is multiplexed to distinguish different terminal devices.
  • the subPDUs between two adjacent E fields with "0" include the RAR of one terminal device, and the subPDUs where the RARs of different terminal devices are located are located in the two subPDUs with the E field of "0".
  • different terminal devices may also be distinguished by the non-first subPDU whose T field is "0".
  • a subPDU whose T field is "0" may be inserted between two types of terminal equipment as identifiers of different terminal equipment. That is, the subPDUs between two adjacent T fields that are "0" include the RAR corresponding to one terminal device, and the subPDUs where the RARs corresponding to different terminal devices are located are located in two subPDUs whose T fields are "0".
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic flowchart of a random access method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • this method is applied to the communication system shown in FIG. 5 .
  • the method may be performed by two communication devices, such as a first communication device and a second communication device.
  • the method is executed by a network device and a terminal device as an example, that is, the first communication device is a terminal device, and the second communication device is a network device as an example.
  • the random access method shown in FIG. 13 is a 4-step random access method, that is, the RNTI involved in the embodiment shown in FIG. 13 is RA-RNTI.
  • the 4-step random access method is taken as an example in FIG. 13 , but it is also applicable to the 2-step random access process.
  • the flow of the random access method shown in FIG. 13 is described as follows.
  • the terminal device sends a preamble to the network device.
  • the network device sends a downlink channel to the terminal device, and the terminal device receives the downlink channel accordingly.
  • the downlink channel includes a MAC PDU bearing RAR.
  • the network device may determine the RA-RNTI corresponding to the terminal device, and scramble the RAR for the preamble based on the RA-RNTI. After the network device scrambles the RAR, it may send the scrambled RAR to the terminal device. For example, the network device sends a downlink channel to the terminal device, and the downlink channel includes the PDSCH carrying the MAC PDU of the RAR.
  • the MAC PDU includes multiple subPDUs, and the network device can configure the RAR of the terminal device to carry K subPDUs associated with M among the multiple subPDUs included in the MAC PDU. That is, K subPDUs can bear the RAR that sends the preamble in the same RO. That is, one RO corresponds to K or (K-1) RARs.
  • K is a positive integer.
  • M is a positive integer, and M can be considered as a parameter for determining the range of subPDUs in which the terminal equipment detects the RAR. Detecting can also be understood as reading, retrieving or searching, etc.
  • the terminal device may determine M, so as to obtain its own RAR in the K subPDUs associated with M.
  • the value of the E field of the last RAR in at least one RAR corresponding to each RO is 0.
  • the value of the E field in each subPDU in the first (K-1) subPDUs of the K subPDUs is 1.
  • the value of the E field of the previous subPDU of the first subPDU of the K subPDUs is 0, and the value of the E field of the K-th subPDU of the K subPDUs is 0. That is, the RAR of a terminal device is located in the subPDU between two adjacent E fields that are "0". For example, it is assumed that the subPDU where the RAR of the terminal device is located is called the first subPDU.
  • the first subPDU may be located between the second subPDU and the third subPDU.
  • the second subPDU may be the (M-1)th subPDU whose E field is "0”
  • the third subPDU may be the Mth subPDU whose E field is "0”
  • M is an integer greater than or equal to 2.
  • the second subPDU is the Mth subPDU whose first field is "0”
  • the third subPDU may be the (M+1)th subPDU whose first field is "0”
  • M is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • Different terminal devices correspond to different M, so the E field in the sub PDU can be reused to distinguish different terminal devices.
  • the first (K-1) subPDUs of the K subPDUs are the first (K-1) subPDUs in sequence. For example, if the index of the first subPDU among the K subPDUs is 0, then the previous (K-1) subPDUs are (K-1) subPDUs with indexes from 0 to (K-2).
  • the first subPDU may also be the second subPDU or the third subPDU. That is, the range of the first subPDU starts from the second subPDU and ends with the third subPDU. Alternatively, the range of the first subPDU starts from the first subPDU after the second subPDU to the third subPDU. Alternatively, the range of the first subPDU starts from the second subPDU to a subPDU before the third subPDU.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of a MAC PDU provided in this embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 14 is n sub PDUs included in the MAC PDU.
  • n subPDUs include 3 E fields with "0"
  • the three subPDUs whose E field is "0" are subPDU3, subPDUm and subPDDUn in sequence. Assume that there are three terminal devices, and the three terminal devices are terminal device 1, terminal device 2, and terminal device 3 respectively. Terminal device 1 parses the received MAC PDU, and terminal device 1 obtains the first subPDU whose E field is "0".
  • Terminal device 1 acquires the RAR before subPDU3.
  • Terminal device 2 parses the received MAC PDU, and terminal device 2 obtains the second subPDU whose E field is "0", namely
  • Terminal device 2 acquires RAR before subPDUm.
  • the terminal device 3 parses the received MAC PDU, and the terminal device 3 obtains the third subPDU whose E field is "0", that is, subPDUN, and considers that the MAC PDU is over.
  • Terminal device 3 obtains RAR before subPDUn.
  • the value of the T field of the last RAR in at least one RAR corresponding to each RO is 0.
  • the value of the T field in each subPDU in the first (K-1) subPDUs of the K subPDUs is 1.
  • the value of the T field of the previous subPDU of the first subPDU of the K subPDUs is 0, and the value of the T field of the K-th subPDU of the K subPDUs is 0.
  • FIG. 15A is a schematic structural diagram of a MAC PDU provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 15A includes 8 sub PDUs in MAC PDU.
  • the subPDUs whose T field is “0” except the first subPDU among the 8 subPDUs are subPDU5 and subPDU7.
  • Terminal device 1 parses the received MAC PDU, and terminal device 1 obtains the first subPDU whose T field is "0", that is, subPDU5, and terminal device 1 obtains RAR before subPDU3.
  • Terminal device 2 parses the received MAC PDU, and terminal device 2 obtains the second subPDU whose T field is "0", that is, subPDU7, and terminal device 2 obtains RAR before subPDU7.
  • the terminal device 3 parses the received MAC PDU, and the terminal device 3 obtains the RAR for the subPDUs after subPDU7.
  • Figure 15A takes the Kth subPDU in the K subPDUs including subheader and MAC RAR as an example.
  • the K th subPDU among the K subPDUs may only include a subheader as an identifier of a different terminal device.
  • FIG. 15B The difference from FIG. 15A is that in FIG. 15B , subPDU5 may include a subheader, and subPDU7 may only include a subheader.
  • the terminal device determines M.
  • the terminal device may determine M, so as to obtain its own RAR in K subPDUs associated with M.
  • M may be indicated by a network device.
  • the network device may send indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate one or more Ms.
  • the terminal device can determine its own M according to the indication information, and then obtain the RAR according to the M.
  • the indication information may be at least one of system information, downlink control information, and downlink control information for scheduling RAR.
  • the network device sends the first indication information to the terminal device.
  • the first indication information may be used to indicate M, for example, the first indication information includes M.
  • S1303 may be performed before S1302, or may be performed after S1302.
  • the terminal device acquires the RAR for the preamble in the K subPDUs associated with M.
  • the subPDU where the RAR of the terminal device is located that is, the first subPDU is located between the second subPDU and the third subPDU.
  • the second subPDU is the (M-1)th subPDU whose E field is "0”
  • the third subPDU is the Mth subPDU whose E field is "0”.
  • the RAR may be acquired between the (M-1)th subPDU whose E field is "0” and the Mth subPDU whose E field is "0" among the K subPDUs associated with M.
  • the second subPDU may be a subPDU whose second E field is "0”
  • the third subPDU may be a subPDU whose third E field is "0”.
  • scheme five can be combined with scheme one, scheme two, scheme three or scheme four.
  • option five is combined with option one.
  • Solution five can be used to distinguish different types (characteristics or groups) of terminal devices, combined with solution one, it can be used to distinguish different terminal devices of the same type of terminal devices.
  • scheme five is combined with scheme two, scheme five can be used to distinguish terminal devices of different types (characteristics or groups), and scheme two can be combined to distinguish different terminal devices among terminal devices of the same type.
  • the scheme five is combined with the scheme three, the scheme five can be used to distinguish different types (characteristics or groups) of terminal equipment, and the scheme three can be combined to distinguish different terminal equipments of the same type of terminal equipment.
  • scheme five is combined with scheme four, scheme five can be used to distinguish different types (characteristics or groups) of terminal equipment, and scheme four can be combined to reduce random access delays of various types of terminal equipment.
  • the methods provided in the embodiments of the present application are introduced from the perspective of interaction between the terminal device and the network device.
  • the steps performed by the network device may also be respectively implemented by different communication devices.
  • the first device is used to determine the RNTI according to the first information
  • the second device is used to scramble the RAR according to the RNTI, that is to say, the first device and the second device jointly complete the steps performed by the network device in the embodiment of the present application, This application does not limit the specific division method.
  • the steps performed by the above network equipment can be respectively It is realized by DU, CU and RU.
  • the terminal device and the network device may include a hardware structure and/or a software module, and realize the above-mentioned functions in the form of a hardware structure, a software module, or a hardware structure plus a software module . Whether one of the above-mentioned functions is executed in the form of a hardware structure, a software module, or a hardware structure plus a software module depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution.
  • this embodiment of the present application provides a communication device.
  • the following describes the communication device used to implement the above method in the embodiment of the present application with reference to the accompanying drawings.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device 1600 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 1600 may include a processing module 1610 and a transceiver module 1620 .
  • a storage unit may also be included, and the storage unit may be used to store instructions (code or program) and/or data.
  • the processing module 1610 and the transceiver module 1620 may be coupled with the storage unit, for example, the processing module 1610 may read instructions (code or program) and/or data in the storage unit to implement a corresponding method.
  • Each of the above units can be set independently, or can be partially or fully integrated.
  • the communication apparatus 1600 can correspondingly implement the behaviors and functions of the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiments, for example, implement the method performed by the terminal device in the embodiment in FIG. 5 or FIG. 8 or FIG. 13 .
  • the communication apparatus 1600 may be a terminal device, or a component (such as a chip or a circuit) applied in the terminal device, or a chip or a chipset in the terminal device, or a part of the chip for performing related method functions.
  • the transceiver module 1620 can be used to perform all receiving or sending operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5, for example, S501, S503, and/or in the embodiment shown in FIG. Other procedures used to support the techniques described herein.
  • the processing module 1610 is used to execute all operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5 except the transceiving operation, such as S504 in the embodiment shown in FIG. Other procedures of the techniques described herein.
  • the transceiver module 1620 may be used to perform all the receiving or sending operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 8, for example, S801, S803, and/or in the embodiment shown in FIG. or other processes used to support the techniques described herein.
  • the processing module 1610 is used to execute all operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 8 except the transceiving operation, such as S804 in the embodiment shown in FIG. Other procedures of the techniques described herein.
  • the transceiver module 1620 may be used to perform all receiving or sending operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 13 , such as S1301, S1302, and/or or other processes used to support the techniques described herein.
  • the processing module 1610 is configured to execute all operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. other processes in support of the techniques described herein.
  • the transceiving module 1620 is configured to send a random access preamble in the first RO.
  • the processing module 1610 is configured to send the random access preamble according to the index s_id of the first OFDM symbol of the first RO, the index t_id of the first time slot of the first RO, the index f_id of the first RO in the frequency domain, and the The identifier ul_carrier_id of the uplink carrier and the first information determine the first RNTI.
  • the first information includes one or more of a, b, c and d.
  • the transceiver module 1620 is also configured to receive a downlink channel according to the first RNTI.
  • the first information is associated with at least one of the following characteristic parameters: the type of the terminal device, the capability of the terminal device, the complexity of the terminal device, the bandwidth of the terminal device, the number of antennas of the terminal device, The transmission type of message 3, the data transmission type, slice capability indication, BWP ID and BWP size.
  • the maximum value of a or the value range of a is related to at least one of the following parameters: the length of the random access preamble, the length of the time domain resource of the random access preamble, and the location of the first RO.
  • the configuration of the BWP is related to at least one of the following parameters: the length of the random access preamble, the length of the time domain resource of the random access preamble, and the location of the first RO.
  • the maximum value of b or the value range of b is related to at least one of the following parameters: the subcarrier spacing of the random access preamble, the length of the random access preamble, and the time domain of the random access preamble The length of the resource, the number of time slots included in a radio frame that can be used to send the random access preamble, and the number of time slots included in a subframe that can be used to send the random access preamble.
  • the sum of a and s_id is less than 14, the sum of b and t_id is less than 80, the sum of c and f_id is less than 8, or the sum of d and ul_carrier_id is less than 3.
  • the length of the time domain resource of the random access preamble is greater than or equal to L, and L is an integer greater than 2;
  • the number of time slots is less than or equal to 80;
  • the number of time slots included in a subframe that can be used to send random access preambles is less than or equal to N, where N is an integer less than 2 ⁇ , and ⁇ is the SCS parameter;
  • the number of time slots included in a radio frame that can be used for The number of subframes for sending the random access preamble is less than or equal to P, where P is an integer less than 10.
  • different first information associations have different feature parameter sets, where the feature parameter sets include one or more feature parameters.
  • the transceiver module 1620 is configured to send a random access preamble to the network device, and receive a MAC PDU from the network device, where the MAC PDU includes multiple subPDUs.
  • the processing module 1610 is configured to determine M, and obtain a random access response for the random access preamble in K subPDUs associated with M.
  • M is a positive integer
  • K is a positive integer.
  • the value of the first field in each subPDU of the first (K-1) subPDUs of the K subPDUs is 1, and the value of the first field of the first subPDU of the first subPDU of the K subPDUs is 0 , the value of the first field of the Kth subPDU of the K subPDUs is 0.
  • the first field is a T field or an E field.
  • the transceiving module 1620 is configured to send a random access preamble to a network device.
  • the processing module 1610 is configured to determine the starting position of the RAR window according to the second information.
  • the transceiver module 1620 is also configured to receive the RAR from the network device according to the starting position of the RAR window determined by the processing module 1610 .
  • the second information is used to indicate the offset of the starting position of the RAR window.
  • the starting position of the RAR window is the first symbol of the first CORESET after M1 symbols after the last symbol of the PRACH.
  • M1 is a positive integer
  • the second information is used to indicate M1.
  • the second information is used to indicate M2.
  • the starting position of the RAR window is the first symbol of the M3-th CORESET one symbol after the last symbol of the RPACH, and M3 is an integer greater than 1.
  • the second information is used to indicate M3.
  • the communication apparatus 1600 can correspondingly implement the behaviors and functions of the network equipment in the foregoing method embodiments, for example, implement the method performed by the network equipment in the embodiment in FIG. 5 or FIG. 8 or FIG. 13 .
  • the communication apparatus 1600 may be a network device, or a component (such as a chip or a circuit) applied in the network device, or a chip or a chipset in the network device, or a part of the chip for performing related method functions.
  • the transceiver module 1620 can be used to perform all receiving or sending operations performed by the network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5, for example, S501, S503, and/or in the embodiment shown in FIG. Other procedures used to support the techniques described herein.
  • the processing module 1610 is used to execute all operations performed by the network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5 except the transceiving operation, such as S502 in the embodiment shown in FIG. Other procedures of the techniques described herein.
  • the transceiver module 1620 may be used to perform all the receiving or sending operations performed by the network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 8, for example, S801, S803, and/or in the embodiment shown in FIG. or other processes used to support the techniques described herein.
  • the processing module 1610 is configured to execute all operations performed by the network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 8 except the transceiving operation, such as S802 in the embodiment shown in FIG. Other procedures of the techniques described herein.
  • the transceiver module 1620 may be used to perform all receiving or sending operations performed by the network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 13 , such as S1301, S1302, and/or in the embodiment shown in FIG. or other processes used to support the techniques described herein.
  • the processing module 1610 is configured to execute all operations performed by the network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 8 except the transceiving operation, and/or other processes for supporting the technology described herein.
  • the transceiving module 1620 is configured to receive a random access preamble from a terminal device in the first RO.
  • the processing module 1610 is configured to send the random access preamble according to the index s_id of the first OFDM symbol of the first RO, the index t_id of the first time slot of the first RO, the index f_id of the first RO in the frequency domain, and the The identifier ul_carrier_id of the uplink carrier and the first information determine the first RNTI.
  • the first information includes one or more of a, b, c and d.
  • the transceiver module 1620 is also configured to send a downlink channel according to the first RNTI.
  • the first information is associated with at least one of the following characteristic parameters: the type of the terminal device, the capability of the terminal device, the complexity of the terminal device, the bandwidth of the terminal device, the number of antennas of the terminal device, The transmission type of message 3, the data transmission type, slice capability indication, BWP ID and BWP size.
  • the maximum value of a or the value range of a is related to at least one of the following parameters: the length of the random access preamble, the length of the time domain resource of the random access preamble, and the location of the first RO.
  • the configuration of the BWP is related to at least one of the following parameters: the length of the random access preamble, the length of the time domain resource of the random access preamble, and the location of the first RO.
  • the maximum value of b or the value range of b is related to at least one of the following parameters: the subcarrier spacing of the random access preamble, the length of the random access preamble, and the time domain of the random access preamble The length of the resource, the number of time slots included in a radio frame that can be used to send the random access preamble, and the number of time slots included in a subframe that can be used to send the random access preamble.
  • the sum of a and s_id is less than 14, the sum of b and t_id is less than 80, the sum of c and f_id is less than 8, or the sum of d and ul_carrier_id is less than 3.
  • the length of the time domain resource of the random access preamble is greater than or equal to L, and L is an integer greater than 2;
  • the number of time slots is less than or equal to 80;
  • the number of time slots included in a subframe that can be used to send random access preambles is less than or equal to N, where N is an integer less than 2 ⁇ , and ⁇ is the SCS parameter;
  • the number of time slots included in a radio frame that can be used for The number of subframes for sending the random access preamble is less than or equal to P, where P is an integer less than 10.
  • different first information associations have different feature parameter sets, where the feature parameter sets include one or more feature parameters.
  • the transceiving module 1620 is configured to receive a random access preamble from a terminal device.
  • the processing module 1610 is used for scrambling the RAR based on the RNTI.
  • the transceiver module 1620 is configured to send MAC PDUs to terminal equipment.
  • the MAC PDU includes multiple subPDUs. K subPDUs associated with M among the multiple subPDUs carry the RAR for the random access preamble.
  • the value of the first field in each subPDU of the first (K-1) subPDUs of the K subPDUs is 1, and the value of the first field of the first subPDU of the first subPDU of the K subPDUs is 0 , the value of the first field of the Kth subPDU of the K subPDUs is 0.
  • the first field is a T field or an E field, M is a positive integer, and K is a positive integer.
  • the transceiving module 1620 is configured to receive a random access preamble from a terminal device.
  • the processing module 1610 is used to determine the starting position of the RAR window.
  • the transceiver module 1620 is further configured to send the RAR to the terminal device according to the starting position of the RAR window determined by the processing module 1610 .
  • the second information is used to indicate the offset of the starting position of the RAR window.
  • the starting position of the RAR window is the first symbol of the first CORESET after M1 symbols after the last symbol of the PRACH.
  • M1 is a positive integer
  • the second information is used to indicate M1.
  • the second signal includes M1-1, or the second information includes M.
  • the second information is used to indicate M2.
  • the second information includes M2, or, the second information includes offset_s.
  • the starting position of the RAR window is the first symbol of the M3-th CORESET one symbol after the last symbol of the RPACH, and M3 is an integer greater than 1.
  • the second information is used to indicate M3.
  • the second signal includes M3-1, or the second information includes M3.
  • the communication device 1700 provided by the embodiment of the present application wherein the communication device 1700 may be a terminal device capable of realizing the functions of the terminal device in the method provided by the embodiment of the present application, or the communication device 1700 may be a network device , can realize the function of the network device in the method provided by the embodiment of the present application; the communication device 1700 can also be a device that can support the terminal device to realize the corresponding function in the method provided by the embodiment of the present application, or can support the network device to realize the implementation of the present application
  • the example provides the means for the corresponding function in the method.
  • the communication device 1700 may be a system on a chip.
  • the system-on-a-chip may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the transceiver module 1620 may be a transceiver, and the transceiver is integrated in the communication device 1700 to form the communication interface 1710 .
  • the communication device 1700 includes at least one processor 1720, configured to implement or support the communication device 1700 to implement the functions of the network device (base station) or terminal device in the method provided by the embodiment of the present application. For details, refer to the detailed description in the method example, and details are not repeated here.
  • the communication device 1700 may also include at least one memory 1730 for storing program instructions and/or data.
  • the memory 1730 is coupled to the processor 1720 .
  • the coupling in the embodiments of the present application is an indirect coupling or a communication connection between devices, units or modules, which may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms, and is used for information exchange between devices, units or modules.
  • Processor 1720 may cooperate with memory 1730 .
  • the processor 1720 may execute program instructions and/or data stored in the memory 1730, so that the communication device 1700 implements a corresponding method. At least one of the at least one memory may be included in the processor. It should be noted that the memory 1730 is not necessary, so it is shown with a dotted line in FIG. 17 .
  • the communication device 1700 may also include a communication interface 1710 for communicating with other devices through a transmission medium, so that devices used in the communication device 1700 can communicate with other devices.
  • a communication interface 1710 for communicating with other devices through a transmission medium, so that devices used in the communication device 1700 can communicate with other devices.
  • the communication device is a terminal
  • the other device is a network device; or, when the communication device is a network device, the other device is a terminal.
  • the processor 1720 can utilize the communication interface 1710 to send and receive data.
  • the communication interface 1710 may specifically be a transceiver.
  • a specific connection medium among the communication interface 1710, the processor 1720, and the memory 1730 is not limited.
  • the memory 1730, the processor 1720, and the communication interface 1710 are connected through the bus 1740.
  • the bus is represented by a thick line in FIG. 17, and the connection between other components is only for schematic illustration. , is not limited.
  • the bus can be divided into address bus, data bus, control bus and so on. For ease of representation, only one thick line is used in FIG. 17 , but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
  • the processor 1720 may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor, an application-specific integrated circuit, a field programmable gate array or other programmable logic device, a discrete gate or transistor logic device, or a discrete hardware component, and may implement Or execute the methods, steps and logic block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application.
  • a general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or any conventional processor or the like. The steps of the methods disclosed in connection with the embodiments of the present application may be directly implemented by a hardware processor, or implemented by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
  • the memory 1730 may be a non-volatile memory, such as a hard disk (hard disk drive, HDD) or a solid-state drive (solid-state drive, SSD), etc., and may also be a volatile memory (volatile memory), For example random-access memory (random-access memory, RAM).
  • a memory is, but is not limited to, any other medium that can be used to carry or store desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures and that can be accessed by a computer.
  • the memory in the embodiment of the present application may also be a circuit or any other device capable of implementing a storage function, and is used for storing program instructions and/or data.
  • the communication device in the above embodiments may be a terminal device or a circuit, or may be a chip applied in the terminal device or other combined devices or components having the functions of the above-mentioned terminal device.
  • the transceiver module may be a transceiver, which may include an antenna and a radio frequency circuit, etc.
  • the processing module may be a processor, such as a central processing unit (CPU).
  • the transceiver module may be a radio frequency unit, and the processing module may be a processor.
  • the communication device When the communication device is a chip system, the communication device may be a field programmable gate array (field programmable gate array, FPGA), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or a system on chip (system on chip).
  • SoC field programmable gate array
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • SoC SoC
  • CPU central processing unit
  • NP network processor
  • DSP digital signal processing circuit
  • MCU microcontroller
  • PLD programmable logic device
  • the processing module may be a processor of the chip system.
  • the transceiver module or the communication interface may be an input/output interface or an interface circuit of the chip system.
  • the interface circuit may be a code/data read/write interface circuit.
  • the interface circuit can be used to receive code instructions (the code instructions are stored in the memory, can be read directly from the memory, or can also be read from the memory through other devices) and transmitted to the processor; the processor can be used to run all The above-mentioned code instructions are used to execute the methods in the above-mentioned method embodiments.
  • the interface circuit may also be a signal transmission interface circuit between the communication processor and the transceiver.
  • the communication device in the foregoing embodiments may be a chip, and the chip may include a logic circuit, an input/output interface, and may also include a memory.
  • the input-output interface can be used to receive code instructions (the code instructions are stored in the memory, can be read directly from the memory, or can also be read from the memory through other devices) and transmitted to the logic circuit; the logic circuit, It can be used to run the code instructions to execute the methods in the above method embodiments.
  • the input and output interface may also be a signal transmission interface circuit between the logic circuit and the transceiver.
  • Fig. 18 shows a schematic structural diagram of a simplified communication device.
  • the communication device is a base station as an example.
  • the base station can be applied to the system shown in FIG. 4 , and can be the network device in FIG. 4 , and execute the functions of the network device in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the communication device 1800 may include a transceiver 1810 , a memory 1821 and a processor 1822 .
  • the transceiver 1810 may be used by a communication device to perform communication, such as sending or receiving the above-mentioned first information and the like.
  • the memory 1821 is coupled with the processor 1822 and can be used to store programs and data necessary for the communication device 1800 to realize various functions.
  • the processor 1822 is configured to support the communication device 1800 to execute corresponding functions in the above methods, and the functions can be realized by calling programs stored in the memory 1821.
  • the transceiver 1810 may be a wireless transceiver, and may be used to support the communication device 1800 to receive and send signaling and/or data through a wireless air interface.
  • the transceiver 1810 may also be referred to as a transceiver unit or a communication unit, and the transceiver 1810 may include one or more radio frequency units 1812 and one or more antennas 1811, wherein the radio frequency unit is such as a remote radio unit (remote radio unit, RRU) Or an active antenna unit (active antenna unit, AAU), which can be specifically used for the transmission of radio frequency signals and the conversion of radio frequency signals and baseband signals, and the one or more antennas can be specifically used for radiating and receiving radio frequency signals.
  • the transceiver 1810 may only include the above radio frequency unit, and at this time the communication device 1800 may include a transceiver 1810 , a memory 1821 , a processor 1822 and an antenna 1811 .
  • the memory 1821 and the processor 1822 can be integrated or independent of each other. As shown in FIG. 18 , the memory 1821 and the processor 1822 can be integrated into the control unit 1820 of the communication device 1800 .
  • the control unit 1820 may include a baseband unit (basebaLduLit, BBU) of an LTE base station, and the baseband unit may also be called a digital unit (digital uLit, DU), or the control unit 1820 may include 5G and future wireless access Distributed unit (distributed uLit, DU) and/or centralized unit (ceLtralized uLit, CU) in the base station under the technology.
  • the above-mentioned control unit 1820 may be composed of one or more antenna panels, where multiple antenna panels may jointly support a wireless access network of a single access standard (such as an LTE network), and multiple antenna panels may also separately support wireless access networks of different access standards. Radio access network (such as LTE network, 5G network or other networks).
  • the memory 1821 and processor 1822 may serve one or more antenna panels. That is to say, the memory 1821 and the processor 1822 may be separately provided on each antenna panel. It is also possible that multiple antenna panels share the same memory 1821 and processor 1822 .
  • necessary circuits may be provided on each antenna panel, for example, the circuits may be used to realize the coupling of the memory 1821 and the processor 1822 .
  • the above transceiver 1810, processor 1822 and memory 1821 may be connected through a bus structure and/or other connection media.
  • the processor 1822 can perform baseband processing on the data to be sent, and then output the baseband signal to the radio frequency unit, and the radio frequency unit performs radio frequency processing on the baseband signal and passes the radio frequency signal through the antenna. Sent in the form of electromagnetic waves.
  • the radio frequency unit receives the radio frequency signal through the antenna, converts the radio frequency signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor 1822, and the processor 1822 converts the baseband signal into data and converts the data to process.
  • the transceiver 1810 can be used to perform the above steps performed by the transceiver module 1620 .
  • the processor 1822 can be used to invoke instructions in the memory 1821 to perform the above steps performed by the processing module 1610 .
  • Fig. 19 shows a schematic structural diagram of a simplified terminal device.
  • the terminal device is taken as an example of a mobile phone.
  • the terminal device includes a processor, a memory, a radio frequency circuit, an antenna, and an input and output device.
  • the processor is mainly used for processing the communication protocol and communication data, controlling the on-board unit, executing software programs, and processing data of the software programs.
  • Memory is primarily used to store software programs and data.
  • the radio frequency circuit is mainly used for the conversion of the baseband signal and the radio frequency signal and the processing of the radio frequency signal.
  • Antennas are mainly used to send and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves.
  • Input and output devices such as touch screens, display screens, and keyboards, are mainly used to receive data input by users and output data to users. It should be noted that some types of equipment may not have input and output devices.
  • the processor When data needs to be sent, the processor performs baseband processing on the data to be sent, and outputs the baseband signal to the radio frequency circuit.
  • the radio frequency circuit receives the radio frequency signal through the antenna, converts the radio frequency signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor, and the processor converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data.
  • FIG. 19 only one memory and processor are shown in FIG. 19 . In an actual device product, there may be one or more processors and one or more memories.
  • a memory may also be called a storage medium or a storage device. The memory may be set independently of the processor, or may be integrated with the processor, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the antenna and the radio frequency circuit having the function of transmitting and receiving can be regarded as the transmitting and receiving unit of the device
  • the processor having the function of processing can be regarded as the processing unit of the device.
  • the device includes a transceiver unit 1910 and a processing unit 1920 .
  • the transceiver unit 1910 may also be called a transceiver, a transceiver, a transceiver device, and the like.
  • the processing unit 1920 may also be called a processor, a processing board, a processing module, a processing device, and the like.
  • the device in the transceiver unit 1910 for realizing the receiving function may be regarded as a receiving unit
  • the device in the transceiver unit 1910 for realizing the sending function may be regarded as a sending unit
  • the transceiver unit 1910 includes a receiving unit and a sending unit.
  • the transceiver unit 1910 may sometimes be called a transceiver, a transceiver, or a transceiver circuit and the like.
  • the receiving unit may sometimes be called a receiver, a receiver, or a receiving circuit, etc.
  • the sending unit may sometimes be called a transmitter, a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit, etc.
  • transceiving unit 1910 is used to perform the sending and receiving operations on the terminal device side in the above method embodiments
  • processing unit 1920 is used to perform other operations on the terminal device in the above method embodiments except the transceiving operation.
  • the transceiver unit 1910 may be configured to execute S501, S503 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5, and/or other processes for supporting the technology described herein.
  • the transceiver unit 1910 may be used to execute S801, S803 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 8, and/or other processes for supporting the technology described herein.
  • the transceiver unit 1910 may be used to execute S1301, S1302 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 13, and/or other processes for supporting the technology described herein.
  • the device may include a transceiver unit and a processing unit.
  • the transceiver unit may be an input-output circuit and/or a communication interface;
  • the processing unit is an integrated processor or a microprocessor or an integrated circuit.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a communication system.
  • the communication system includes a network device and a terminal device, or may further include more network devices and multiple terminal devices.
  • the communication system includes a network device and a terminal device for realizing the related functions in FIG. 4 above.
  • the network devices are respectively used to realize the functions of the relevant network parts in FIG. 5 or FIG. 8 or FIG. 13 above.
  • the terminal device is used to implement the functions of the terminal device in FIG. 5 or FIG. 8 or FIG. 13 above.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, including instructions, which, when run on a computer, cause the computer to execute the method performed by the network device in Figure 5 or Figure 8 or Figure 13; or when it is run on the computer During operation, the computer is made to execute the method executed by the terminal device in FIG. 5 or FIG. 8 .
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product, including instructions, when it runs on a computer, it causes the computer to execute the method performed by the network device in Figure 5 or Figure 8 or Figure 13; or when it runs on the computer , causing the computer to execute the method executed by the terminal device in FIG. 5 or FIG. 8 or FIG. 13 .
  • An embodiment of the present application provides a chip system, the chip system includes a processor, and may also include a memory, for implementing the functions of the network device or terminal in the foregoing method; or for realizing the functions of the network device and the terminal in the foregoing method.
  • the system-on-a-chip may consist of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • At least one item (piece) of a, b or c can represent: a, b, c, a and b, a and c, b and c, or a, b and c, wherein a, b, c Can be single or multiple.
  • first and second are used to distinguish multiple objects, and are not used to limit the order, timing, priority or priority of multiple objects. Importance.
  • first subPDU and the second subPDU are only used to distinguish different subPDUs, but do not indicate the difference in priority or importance of the two subPDUs.
  • sequence numbers of the above-mentioned processes do not mean the order of execution, and the execution order of the processes should be determined by their functions and internal logic, and should not be used in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the implementation process constitutes any limitation.
  • the disclosed systems, devices and methods may be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
  • multiple units or components can be combined or May be integrated into another system, or some features may be ignored, or not implemented.
  • the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be through some interfaces, and the indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components shown as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Part or all of the units can be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.
  • the functions described above are realized in the form of software function units and sold or used as independent products, they can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present application is essentially or the part that contributes to the prior art or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM), random access memory (random access memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disc and other media that can store program codes. .

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

本申请公开一种随机接入方法及通信装置，该方法包括：终端设备在第一RO发送随机接入前导，并根据s_id、t_id、f_id和ul_carrier_id以及第一信息确定第一RNTI，再根据第一RNTI接收下行信道。其中，第一RNTI满足：第一RNTI＝1+s_id+a+14×(t_id+b)+14×80×(f_id+c)+14×80×8×(ul_carrier_id+d)。第一信息包括a、b、c以及d中的一种或多种。由于a、b、c以及d中的一种或多种，可使得RNTI产生偏移。不同的终端设备对应的a、b、c或d不同，可使得不同的终端设备对应不同的RNTI。即使不同终端设备发送随机接入前导的RO的时域资源相同，且该RO的频域资源的索引相同，通过RNTI仍然能够区分不同的终端设备，提高终端设备随机接入的成功率，提高通信效率。

Description

一种随机接入方法及通信装置
相关申请的交叉引用
本申请要求在2021年07月16日提交国家知识产权局、申请号为202110805895.6、申请名称为“一种随机接入方法及通信装置”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请涉及随机接入技术领域，尤其涉及一种随机接入方法及通信装置。
背景技术
当终端设备期望向网络设备发送上行数据时，终端设备可以发起随机接入(random access，RA)。例如，终端设备可在随机接入信道时机(random access channel，(RACH)occasion，RO)中向网络设备发送随机接入前导(preamble)，并在发送了preamble之后，在一段时间内接收随机接入响应(random access response，RAR)。该段时间称为RAR的检测窗，或者RAR检测窗或RAR窗。RAR可由终端设备对应的无线网络临时标识(radio network temporary identifier，RNTI)加扰。RNTI主要用来区分终端设备发送preamble占用的RO，RO包括时域资源和频域资源，以保证终端设备在发送preamble的RO上接收对应的RAR。
目前RNTI是根据RO的时域资源和频域资源索引确定的。如果两个终端设备的初始上行带宽部分(bandwidth part，BWP)不同，网络设备根据这两个终端设备各自的BWP，为这两个终端设备配置发送preamble的RO，那么即使这两个终端设备被配置的RO的频域资源不同，但RO的索引可能相同，如果这两个终端设备被配置的RO的时域资源也相同，按照现有技术中RNTI和RAR窗的设计，会导致两个终端设备根据RO所确定的RNTI相同。因此，通过RNTI可能无法区分不同的终端设备。从而导致随机接入资源冲突，通信效率低。
发明内容
本申请提供一种随机接入方法及通信装置，可以减少随机接入资源冲突，提高通信效率。
第一方面，提供了一种随机接入该方法可由第一通信装置执行，第一通信装置可以是通信设备或能够支持通信设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，例如芯片系统。下面以所述通信设备为终端设备为例进行描述。该方法包括：
终端设备在第一RO发送随机接入前导，并根据s_id、t_id、f_id和ul_carrier_id以及第一信息确定第一RNTI，再根据第一RNTI接收下行信道。其中，第一RNTI满足如下公式：第一RNTI＝1+s_id+a+14×(t_id+b)+14×80×(f_id+c)+14×80×8×(ul_carrier_id+d)。第一信息包括a、b、c以及d中的一种或多种。s_id为第一RO的第一个正交频分复用(orthogonal frequency division multiplexing，OFDM)符号的索引。t_id为第一RO所在的第一个时隙在 无线帧中的索引。f_id是第一RO在频域的索引。ul_carrier_id发送所述随机接入前导所使用的上行载波的标识。该方案通过a、b、c以及d中的一种或多种，可使得RNTI产生偏移。不同的终端设备对应的a、b、c或d不同，即不同的终端设备对应的RNTI不同。即使不同终端设备发送随机接入前导的RO的时域资源相同，且该RO的频域资源的索引相同，由于不同的终端设备对应的RNTI不同，所以通过RNTI仍然能够区分不同的终端设备。这样各个终端设备根据RNTI能够确定所检测到的RAR是否属于自己，即可尽量保证终端设备接收正确的RAR，提高终端设备随机接入的成功率。
在可能的实现方式中，第一信息与如下的至少一项特征参量相关联：终端设备的类型，终端设备的能力，终端设备的复杂度，终端设备的带宽，终端设备的天线数，消息3的传输类型，数据的传输类型，切片能力指示，BWP标识(identifier，ID)，或者BWP大小。
在可能的实现方式中，a的最大值或a的取值范围与以下至少一种参数相关：随机接入前导的长度、随机接入前导的时域资源的长度，第一RO所在的BWP的配置。该方案中，a的最大值或a的取值范围可取决于如上参数的一种或多种，以尽量保证通过a确定的RNTI能够区分更多不同的终端设备。
在可能的实现方式中，所述b的最大值或b的取值范围与以下至少一种参数相关：随机接入前导的子载波间隔，随机接入前导的长度，随机接入前导的时域资源的长度，一个无线帧包括的可用于发送随机接入前导的时隙数，或者，一个子帧包括的可用于发送随机接入前导的时隙数。该方案可根据如上参数来确定b的最大取值或b的取值范围，以尽量保证通过b确定的RNTI能够区分更多不同的终端设备。
在可能的实现方式中，满足如下的至少一项：
a与s_id之和小于14。这样可避免使用不同时隙中的符号所确定的RNTI相同，从而通过RNTI能够区分不同的终端设备，提高终端设备随机接入的成功率。
b与t_id之和小于80。这样可避免使用不同无线帧中的时隙所确定的RNTI相同，从而通过RNTI能够区分不同的终端设备，提高终端设备随机接入的成功率。
c与f_id之和小于8。这样可避免使用不同上行载波所确定的RNTI相同，从而通过RNTI能够区分不同的终端设备，提高终端设备随机接入的成功率。
d与ul_carrier_id之和小于3。这样可避免所确定的RNTI超出RNTI的最大允许范围，即避免确定无效的RNTI。
在可能的实现方式中，满足如下的至少一项：随机接入前导的时域资源的长度大于或等于L，L为大于2的整数。或者，一个无线帧包括的可用于发送随机接入前导的时隙数小于或等于80。或者，一个子帧包括的可用于发送随机接入前导的时隙数小于或等于N，N为小于2μ的整数，μ为子载波间隔(subcarrier spacing，SCS)参数。或者，一个无线帧包括的可用于发送随机接入前导的子帧数小于或等于P，P为小于10的整数。或者，随机接入前导频分复用参数的取值小于Q，Q为小于8的整数。该方案通过配置用于发送preamble的时域资源，来增加RNTI更多可用的取值，也就是增加没有使用的RNTI，从而用来区分更多类型的终端设备。
在可能的实现方式中，不同的第一信息关联的特征参量集合不同，特征参量集合包含一种或多种特征参量。该方案通过配置相同RNTI对应的RO发送随机接入前导的终端设备的特征参量的种类来区分不同类型的终端设备，降低各类终端设备随机接入的时延。
第二方面，提供了一种随机接入该方法可由第二通信装置执行，第二通信装置可以是 通信设备或能够支持通信设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，例如芯片系统。下面以所述通信设备为网络设备为例进行描述。该方法包括：
网络设备在第一RO接收来自终端设备的随机接入前导，并基于第一信息，以及第一RO的第一个OFDM符号的索引s_id、第一RO的第一个时隙的索引t_id、第一RO在频域的索引f_id、发送随机接入前导所使用的上行载波的标识ul_carrier_id确定第一RNTI，并基于第一RNTI发送下行信道。其中，第一RNTI满足：第一RNTI＝1+s_id+a+14×(t_id+b)+14×80×(f_id+c)+14×80×8×(ul_carrier_id+d)。第一信息包括a、b、c以及d中的一种或多种。
在可能的实现方式中，第一信息与如下的至少一项特征参量相关联：终端设备的类型，终端设备的能力，终端设备的复杂度，终端设备的带宽，终端设备的天线数，消息3的传输类型，数据的传输类型，切片能力指示，BWP ID，或BWP大小。
在可能的实现方式中，a的最大值或a的取值范围与以下至少一种参数相关：随机接入前导的长度、随机接入前导的时域资源的长度，第一RO所在的BWP的配置。
在可能的实现方式中，b的最大值或b的取值范围与以下至少一种参数相关：随机接入前导的子载波间隔，随机接入前导的长度，随机接入前导的时域资源的长度，一个无线帧包括的可用于发送随机接入前导的时隙数，一个子帧包括的可用于发送随机接入前导的时隙数。
在可能的实现方式中，满足如下至少一项：a与s_id之和小于14，b与t_id之和小于80，c与f_id之和小于8，或者，d与ul_carrier_id之和小于3。
在可能的实现方式中，满足如下的至少一项：随机接入前导的时域资源的长度大于或等于L，L为大于2的整数。一个无线帧包括的可用于发送随机接入前导的时隙数小于或等于80。一个子帧包括的可用于发送随机接入前导的时隙数小于或等于N，N为小于2 μ的整数，μ为SCS参数。一个无线帧包括的可用于发送随机接入前导的子帧数小于或等于P，P为小于10的整数。
在可能的实现方式中，不同的第一信息关联的特征参量集合不同，特征参量集合包含一种或多种特征参量。
上述第二方面及其实现方式的有益效果可以参考对第一方面或第一方面及其实现方式的有益效果的描述。
第三方面，提供了一种随机接入该方法可由第一通信装置执行，第一通信装置可以是通信设备或能够支持通信设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，例如芯片系统。下面以所述通信设备为终端设备为例进行描述。该方法包括：
终端设备向网络设备发送随机接入前导，并接收来自网络设备的媒体接入控制(media access control，MAC)协议数据单元(protocol data unit，PDU)。MAC PDU包括多个子协议数据单元(subPDU)。终端设备确定M，并在与M关联的K个subPDU中获取针对随机接入前导的随机接入响应。M是正整数，K是正整数。K个subPDU的前(K-1)个subPDU中的每个subPDU内的第一字段取值都为1，且K个subPDU的第一个subPDU的前一个subPDU的第一字段的取值为0，K个subPDU的第K个subPDU的第一字段的取值为0。第一字段为T字段或E字段。该方案中，第K-1个为“0”的第一字段的subPDU和第K个为“0”的第一字段的subPDU之间包括一个终端设备对应的RAR。不同的终端设备对应的M不同，从而各个终端设备可根据M确定在哪些sub PDU中获取RAR，从而达到区分不同终端设备的目的。
第四方面，提供了一种随机接入该方法可由第二通信装置执行，第二通信装置可以是通信设备或能够支持通信设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，例如芯片系统。下面以所述通信设备为网络设备为例进行描述。该方法包括：
网络设备接收来自终端设备的随机接入前导，基于RNTI对RAR进行加扰，并向终端设备发送MAC PDU。MAC PDU包括多个subPDU。多个subPDU中与M关联的K个subPDU承载针对随机接入前导的随机接入响应。K个subPDU的前(K-1)个subPDU中的每个subPDU内的第一字段取值都为1，且K个subPDU的第一个subPDU的前一个subPDU的第一字段的取值为0，K个subPDU的第K个subPDU的第一字段的取值为0。第一字段为T字段或E字段，M是正整数，K是正整数。
上述第四方面及其实现方式的有益效果可以参考对第三方面或第三方面及其实现方式的有益效果的描述。
第五方面，提供了一种随机接入该方法可由第一通信装置执行，第一通信装置可以是通信设备或能够支持通信设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，例如芯片系统。下面以所述通信设备为终端设备为例进行描述。该方法包括：
终端设备向网络设备发送随机接入前导，并基于第二信息确定RAR窗的起始位置，根据所确定的RAR窗的起始位置接收来自网络设备的RAR。其中，第二信息用于指示RAR窗的起始位置的偏移。该方案通过为RAR窗的起始位置设计偏移，可以使得不同终端设备的RAR窗的起始位置不同。这样即使不同终端设备计算的RNTI相同，由于RAR窗的起始位置不同，也能够区分属于自己的RAR，可以避免随机接入资源冲突，从而提高通信效率。
本方案中，RAR窗的起始位置的偏移粒度可以是符号，也可以是时隙，还可以是控制资源集(control resource set，CORESET)。
在可能的实现方式中，RAR窗的起始位置为PRACH的最后一个符号之后的M1个符号后的第一个CORESET的第一个符号。M1为正整数，所述第二信息用于指示M1。即RAR窗的起始位置的偏移粒度为符号。
在可能的实现方式中，RAR窗的起始位置为RPACH的最后一个符号之后的M2个符号后的第一个CORESET的第一个符号，其中，M2＝1+14×offset_s。所述第二信息用于指示M2。即RAR窗的起始位置的偏移粒度为时隙。
在可能的实现方式中，RAR窗的起始位置为RPACH的最后一个符号后的1个符号后的第M3个CORESET的第一个符号，M3为大于1的整数。第二信息用于指示M3。即RAR窗的起始位置的偏移粒度为CORESET。
第六方面，提供了一种随机接入该方法可由第二通信装置执行，第二通信装置可以是通信设备或能够支持通信设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，例如芯片系统。下面以所述通信设备为网络设备为例进行描述。该方法包括：
网络设备接收来自终端设备的随机接入前导，并确定RAR窗的起始位置，根据所确定的RAR窗的起始位置向终端设备发送RAR。其中，第二信息用于指示RAR窗的起始位置的偏移。
在可能的实现方式中，RAR窗的起始位置为PRACH的最后一个符号之后的M1个符号后的第一个CORESET的第一个符号。M1为正整数，所述第二信息用于指示M1。
在可能的实现方式中，RAR窗的起始位置为RPACH的最后一个符号之后的M2个符 号后的第一个CORESET的第一个符号，其中，M2＝1+14×offset_s。
在可能的实现方式中，RAR窗的起始位置为RPACH的最后一个符号后的1个符号后的第M3个CORESET的第一个符号，M3为大于1的整数。第二信息用于指示M3。
上述第六方面及其实现方式的有益效果可以参考对第五方面或第五方面及其实现方式的有益效果的描述。
第七方面，本申请实施例提供了一种通信装置，所述通信装置可具有实现上述第一方面的方法实例中行为的功能，有益效果可以参见第一方面的描述此处不再赘述。该通信装置可以是第一方面中的终端设备，或者该通信装置可以是能够支持第一方面中终端设备实现第一方面提供的方法所需的功能的装置，例如芯片或芯片系统。
或者，所述通信装置也可具有实现上述第三方面的方法实例中行为的功能，有益效果可以参见第三方面的描述此处不再赘述。该通信装置可以是第三方面中的终端设备，或者该通信装置可以是能够支持第三方面中终端设备实现第三方面提供的方法所需的功能的装置，例如芯片或芯片系统。
或者，通信装置也可具有实现上述第五方面的方法实例中行为的功能，有益效果可以参见第五方面的描述此处不再赘述。该通信装置可以是第五方面中的终端设备，或者该通信装置可以是能够支持第五方面中终端设备实现第五方面提供的方法所需的功能的装置，例如芯片或芯片系统。
在一个可能的设计中，该通信装置包括用于执行第一方面或第三方面或第五方面的方法的相应手段(means)或模块。例如，所述通信装置：包括处理单元(有时也称为处理模块)和/或收发单元(有时也称为收发模块)。这些单元(模块)可以执行上述第一方面或第三方面或第五方面方法示例中的相应功能，具体参见方法示例中的详细描述，此处不做赘述。
第八方面，本申请实施例提供了一种通信装置，所述通信装置可具有实现上述第二方面的方法实例中行为的功能，有益效果可以参见第二方面的描述此处不再赘述。该通信装置可以是第二方面中的终端设备，或者该通信装置可以是能够支持第二方面中终端设备实现第二方面提供的方法所需的功能的装置，例如芯片或芯片系统。
或者，所述通信装置也可具有实现上述第四方面的方法实例中行为的功能，有益效果可以参见第四方面的描述此处不再赘述。该通信装置可以是第四方面中的终端设备，或者该通信装置可以是能够支持第四方面中终端设备实现第四方面提供的方法所需的功能的装置，例如芯片或芯片系统。
或者，通信装置也可具有实现上述第六方面的方法实例中行为的功能，有益效果可以参见第六方面的描述此处不再赘述。该通信装置可以是第六方面中的终端设备，或者该通信装置可以是能够支持第六方面中终端设备实现第六方面提供的方法所需的功能的装置，例如芯片或芯片系统。
在一个可能的设计中，该通信装置包括用于执行第二方面或第四方面的方法的相应手段(means)或模块。例如，所述通信装置：包括处理单元(有时也称为处理模块)和/或收发单元(有时也称为收发模块)。这些单元(模块)可以执行上述第二方面或第四方面方法示例中的相应功能，具体参见方法示例中的详细描述，此处不做赘述。
第九方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，该通信装置可以为上述实施例中第七方面或第八方面中的通信装置，或者为设置在第七方面或第八方面中的通信装置中的芯片或 芯片系统。该通信装置包括通信接口以及处理器，可选的，还包括存储器。其中，该存储器用于存储计算机程序或指令或者数据，处理器与存储器、通信接口耦合，当处理器读取所述计算机程序或指令或数据时，使通信装置执行上述方法实施例中由终端设备或网络设备所执行的方法。
第十方面，本申请实施例提供了一种通信装置，该通信装置包括输入输出接口和逻辑电路。输入输出接口用于输入和/或输出信息。逻辑电路用于执行第一方面至第六方面中任意一方面或多个方面中所述的方法。
第十一方面，本申请实施例提供了一种芯片系统，该芯片系统包括处理器，还可以包括存储器和/或通信接口，用于实现第一方面至第六方面中任意一方面或多个方面中所述的方法。在一种可能的实现方式中，所述芯片系统还包括存储器，用于保存程序指令和/或数据。该芯片系统可以由芯片构成，也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。
第十二方面，本申请实施例提供了一种通信系统，所述通信系统包括第七方面中用于执行第一方面方法的通信装置和第八方面中用于执行第二方面方法的通信装置。或者，所述通信系统包括第七方面中用于执行第三方面方法的通信装置和第八方面中用于执行第四方面方法的通信装置。或者，所述通信系统包括第七方面中用于执行第五方面方法的通信装置和第八方面中用于执行第六方面方法的通信装置。或者所述通信系统包括第七方面中用于执行第一方面方法的通信装置和第八方面中用于执行第二方面方法的通信装置。或者所述通信系统包括第七方面中用于执行第三方面方法的通信装置和第八方面中用于执行第四方面方法的通信装置。或者所述通信系统包括第七方面中用于执行第五方面方法的通信装置和第八方面中用于执行第六方面方法的通信装置。
第十三方面，本申请提供了一种计算机可读存储介质，该计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序，当该计算机程序被运行时，实现上述第一方面至第六方面中的一个方面或多个方面中的方法。
第十四方面，提供了一种计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品包括：计算机程序代码，当所述计算机程序代码被运行时，使得上述第一方面至第六方面中的一个方面或多个方面中的方法被执行。
上述第七方面至第十四方面及其实现方式的有益效果可以参考前述第一方面至第六方面的任一方面及第一方面至第六方面的任一方面的可能实现方式的有益效果的描述。
附图说明
图1为现有技术的RA-RNTI的一示例的应用示意图；
图2为不同的终端设备对应相同RA-RNTI的示意图；
图3为不同类型的终端设备对应相同RA-RNTI的示意图；
图4为本申请实施例适用的网络架构的一种示意图；
图5为本申请实施例提供的第一种随机接入方法的流程示意图；
图6为4个终端设备计算RA-RNTI分别对应的a的取值的示意图；
图7为2个终端设备计算RA-RNTI分别对应的a的取值的示意图；
图8为本申请实施例提供的第二种随机接入方法的流程示意图；
图9为本申请实施例提供的两组RO以及RAR窗示意图；
图10为本申请实施例提供的三个终端设备采用的第一信息(a)的示意图；
图11为本申请实施例提供的随机接入过程的一种示意图；
图12为本申请实施例提供的MAC PDU的第一种结构示意图；
图13为本申请实施例提供的第二种随机接入方法的流程示意图；
图14为本申请实施例提供的MAC PDU的第二种结构示意图；
图15A为本申请实施例提供的MAC PDU的第三种结构示意图；
图15B为本申请实施例提供的MAC PDU的第四种结构示意图；
图16为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的一种结构示意图；
图17为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的另一种结构示意图；
图18为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的另一种结构示意图；
图19为本申请实施例提供的另一通信装置的另一种结构示意图。
具体实施方式
为了实现终端设备与网络设备之间的数据传输，终端设备通过随机接入过程与网络设备建立连接。终端设备进行随机接入过程时，可向网络设备发送preamble(又称为消息1(message1，Msg1))，以发起随机接入过程。网络设备检测到该preamble后，根据发送preamble的RO计算出一个RNTI，并根据该RNTI对要发送给终端设备的RAR(又称为消息2(message2，Msg2))进行加扰，并将加扰后的RAR发送给终端设备。终端设备根据发送preamble的RO计算出一个RNTI，在发送preamble之后间隔一段时间(例如第一时间间隔)开始在RAR窗监测网络设备使用该RNTI标识的RAR。第一时间间隔由3GPP协议定义，例如在长期演进(long term evolution，LTE)系统，RAR窗监测的起始时间为终端设备发送preamble的最后一个子帧(sub-frame)+3个子帧(第一时间间隔)；在NR系统中，RAR监测的起始时间为终端设备发送preamble的最后一个符号(symbol)加上某个固定时间(第一时间间隔)。
只有网络设备和终端设备所使用的RNTI相同时，终端设备才能正确接收RAR。现有技术的4-step RACH中，RNTI为RA-RNTI，RA-RNTI满足公式(1-1)：
RA-RNTI＝1+s_id+14×t_id+14×80×f_id+14×80×8×ul_carrier_id    (1-1)
在公式(1-1)中，s_id是RO所在的第一个OFDM符号在时隙中的索引，t_id是RO所在的第一个时隙(slot)在无线帧中的索引，f_id是RO在频域的索引，ul_carrier_id是上行载波索引。需要说明的是，本文中无线帧也称为帧，换句话说，本文中的无线帧可替换为帧。
为了便于理解，请参见图1，为RA-RNTI的一种应用示意图。图1以子载波带宽(subcarrier space，SCS)是120kHz为例。如图1所示，有80个时隙(每个时隙可包括14个OFDM符号)，4个RO分别为RO1、RO2、RO3和RO4。RO1、RO2、RO3和RO4对应的s_id和ul_carrier_id均为0，即s_id＝0,ul_carrier_id＝0,RO1和RO2对应的t_id为0，RO3和RO4对应的t_id为40，RO1对应的f_id为0，RO2对应的f_id为1，RO3对应的f_id为0，RO4对应的f_id为1。
RO1对应的RA-RNTI满足：RA-RNTI＝1+0+14×0+14×80×0+14×80×8×0＝1；
RO2对应的RA-RNTI满足：RA-RNTI＝1+0+14×0+14×80×1+14×80×8×0＝1121；
RO3对应的RA-RNTI满足：RA-RNTI＝1+0+14×40+14×80×0+14×80×8×0＝561；
RO4对应的RA-RNTI满足：RA-RNTI＝1+0+14×40+14×80×1+14×80×8×0＝1681。
类似的，如果随机接入过程是2-step随机接入，RNTI为MSGB的RNTI(MSGB-RNTI)满足公式(1-2)：
MSGB-RNTI＝1+s_id+14×t_id+14×80×f_id+14×80×8×ul_carrier_id+14×80×8×2      (1-2)
可看出公式(1-2)与公式(1-1)的区别之处在于，公式(1-2)比公式(1-1)多了一个常数，即“14×80×8×2”。该常数主要用于与基于竞争的4-step随机接入的RNTI(也就是RA-RNTI)的区分。应理解，本申请实施例中的RNTI为可用于识别、监测或检测随机接入响应的RNTI。为方便描述，下文中以RA-RNTI为例。应理解，在不冲突的情况下，全文中RA-RNTI+14×80×8×2等价于MSGB-RNTI。
假设两个终端设备的初始上行BWP不同。以两个终端设备为例，网络设备根据这两个终端设备各自的BWP，为这两个终端设备配置发送preamble的RO，那么这两个终端设备被配置的RO的频域资源的索引可能相同。如果这两个终端设备被配置的RO的时域资源相同，沿用目前RAR窗的设计，按照公式(1-1)确定RA-RNTI，会导致两个终端设备接收的RAR对应的RA-RNTI相同。这样通过RA-RNTI可能无法区分不同的终端设备，会导致一个终端设备可能接收属于另一个终端设备的RAR，即导致终端设备接收错误的RAR。应理解，如果两个终端设备的初始下行BWP相同，那么这两个(或两类或者两组)终端设备发送preamble的RO的时域资源可能相同，且该RO的频域资源的索引也可能相同，同样会出现通过RA-RNTI可能无法区分不同的终端设备的问题。
为了便于理解，请参见图2，为两个终端设备对应的RO的示意图。图3以两个终端设备分别为终端设备1和终端设备2为例。终端设备1的初始上行BWP为BWP1，终端设备2的初始上行BWP为BWP2。网络设备在BWP1中为终端设备配置RO，网络设备在BWP2中为终端设备配置RO。例如，BWP1和BWP2上均有4个RO，这4个RO为RO-1、RO-2、RO-3以及RO-4。虽然两个RO-1的频域资源不同，但是在BWP1中RO-1的频域资源的索引和在BWP2中RO-1的频域资源的索引相同。并且BWP1中的RO-1的时域资源和BWP2中的RO-1的时域资源相同。假设终端设备1在BWP1上的RO-1发送preamble，终端设备2在BWP2上的RO-1发送preamble。由于BWP1上的RO-1和BWP2上的RO-1的时域资源相同，那么终端设备1和终端设备2对应的RAR窗的起始时间相同。另外，BWP1上的RO-1和BWP2上的RO-1的频域资源的索引也相同，按照现有技术中RA-RNTI的设计，终端设备1对应的RA-RNTI和终端设备2对应的RA-RNTI相同。终端设备1和终端设备2在相同的RAR窗检测到的RAR对应的RA-RNTI相同，那么终端设备1和终端设备2根据RA-RNTI无法确定所检测到的RAR是否属于自己，会导致终端设备1可能获取属于终端设备2的RAR。即终端设备1接收错误的RAR。
随着终端设备的类型(或者终端设备支持的特性)越来越多，例如有传统legacy终端设备、REDCAP终端设备，覆盖增强(coverage enhancement，CE)终端设备、小数据传输(small data transmission，SDT)终端设备、接入网切片(RAN slicing)终端设备。有提出复用随机接入来区分不同类型或不同组的终端设备。例如，复用2-step随机接入来区分不同组/类型终端设备，或者复用4-step随机接入来区分不同组/类型终端设备。与图2的原理类似，在随机接入过程中，基于RNTI也可能无法区分不同类型的终端设备，或者不同组的终端设备。为方便描述，以随机接入过程无法区分不同类型的终端设备为例。
请参见图3，为两类终端设备对应的RO的示意图。这两类终端设备例如为普通(legacy)终端设备和低复杂度(reduced capability，REDCAP)终端设备。REDCAP终端设备的初 始上行BWP为BWP1，legacy终端设备的初始上行BWP为BWP2。REDCAP终端设备在BWP1上的RO1发送preamble，legacy终端设备在BWP2上的RO2发送preamble。RO1和RO2的时域资源相同，且RO1和RO2的频域资源的索引相同。按照现有技术中RA-RNTI和RAR窗的设计，REDCAP终端设备和legacy终端设备对应的RAR窗监测的起始时间相同，REDCAP终端设备对应的RA-RNTI和legacy终端设备对应的RA-RNTI相同。因此，在随机接入过程中，基于RA-RNTI也可能无法区分不同类型的终端设备。
另外，由于终端设备的类型会越来越多，较多种类型的终端设备同时通过随机接入来区分，那么单位时间内用于RAR的RA-RNTI的数量就会增加，显然目前的RA-RNTI不足以区分多种类型的终端设备。例如，在2-step随机接入或4-step随机接入中，RA-RNTI的取值范围为0001–FFF2(即1～65522)。沿用目前的方法，RNTI最大值为14×80×8×2×2＝35840。而RNTI的取值范围为0～65535，所以，RNTI还可以通过该方式指示1个类型的终端设备或1组终端设备，无法指示更多种类型或更多组终端设备。
鉴于此，本申请实施例提供了五种技术方案。本申请实施例提供的五种技术方案均可以应用于各种通信系统，例如：LTE系统、第五代(5th generation，5G)系统，如新无线(new radio，NR)系统，及下一代的通信系统，如6G系统或其他类似的通信系统，具体的不做限制。
请参见图4，为本申请实施例适用的一种网络架构，通信系统包括网络设备和终端设备，网络设备和终端设备可以相互通信。应理解，图4中的网络架构是以一个网络设备和一个终端设备通信为例，在实际应用中，通信系统中网络设备和终端设备的数量还可以更多，网络设备和网络设备之间、或者终端设备和终端设备之间也可以相互通信。一个网络设备可以同时与多个终端设备通信。多个网络设备也可以同时与某个终端设备进行通信。
终端设备，可为用户设备(user equipment，UE)，有时也称为终端、接入站、UE站、远方站、无线通信设备、或用户装置等等。终端设备是一种具有无线收发功能的设备，可以向网络设备发送信号，或接收来自网络设备的信号。所述终端设备用于连接人，物，机器等，可广泛用于各种场景，例如包括但不限于以下场景：蜂窝通信、设备到设备通信(device-to-device，D2D)、车到一切(vehicle to everything，V2X)、机器到机器/机器类通信(machine-to-machine/machine-type communications，M2M/MTC)、物联网(internet of things，IoT)、虚拟现实(virtual reality，VR)、增强现实(augmented reality，AR)、工业控制(industrial control)、无人驾驶(self driving)、远程医疗(remote medical)、智能电网(smart grid)、智能家具、智能办公、智能穿戴、智能交通，智慧城市(smart city)、无人机、机器人等场景的终端设备。本申请实施例中的所述终端设备可以是手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑(Pad)、带无线收发功能的电脑、虚拟现实(virtual reality，VR)终端、增强现实(augmented reality，AR)终端、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端、IoT网络中智能音箱、远程医疗中的无线终端设备、智能电网中的无线终端设备、运输安全中的无线终端设备、智慧城市中的无线终端设备，或智慧家庭中的无线终端设备等等。作为示例而非限定，在本申请的实施例中，该终端设备还可以是可穿戴设备。可穿戴设备也可以称为穿戴式智能设备或智能穿戴式设备等，是应用穿戴式技术对日常穿戴进行智能化设计、开发出可以穿戴的设备的总称，如眼镜、手套、手表、服饰及鞋等。终端设备还可以包括中继(relay)。或者理解为，能够与基站进行数据通信的都可以看作终端设备。而如上介绍的各种终端设备，如果位于车辆上(例如放置在 车辆内或安装在车辆内)，都可以认为是车载终端设备，车载终端设备例如也称为车载单元(on-board unit，OBU)。另外，本申请实施例中，终端设备可以是指用于实现终端的功能的装置，也可以是能够支持终端设备实现该功能的装置，例如芯片系统，该装置可以被安装在终端设备中。例如终端设备也可以是车辆探测器。本申请实施例中，芯片系统可以由芯片构成，也可以包括芯片和其他分立器件。本申请实施例提供的技术方案中，以用于实现终端的功能的装置是终端设备为例，描述本申请实施例提供的技术方案。
网络设备是终端设备通过无线方式接入到该移动通信系统中的接入设备，包括接入网(access network，AN)设备，例如基站。网络设备也可以是指在空口与终端设备通信的设备。网络设备可以包括LTE系统或高级长期演进(long term evolution-advanced，LTE-A)中的演进型基站(evolutional Node B)，可简称为eNB或e-NodeB)；或者也可以包括5G NR系统中的下一代节点B(next generation node B，gNB)；或者也可以包括无线保真(wIreless-fIdelity，Wi-Fi)系统中的接入节点等；或者网络设备可以为中继站、车载设备以及未来演进的公共陆地移动网络(Public Land Mobile Network，PLMN)设备、设备到设备(device-to-device，D2D)网络中的设备、机器到机器(machine to machine，M2M)网络中的设备、物联网(internet of things，IoT)网络中的设备或者其他网络PLMN网络中的网络设备等。本申请的实施例对网络设备所使用的具体技术和具体设备形态不做限定。举例来说，图4中的网络设备可以是基站，在不同的系统对应不同的设备，例如图4中的网络设备在第四代移动通信技术(the fourth generation，4G)系统中可以对应eNB，在5G系统中对应gNB。
另外，本申请实施例中的基站可以包括集中式单元(centralized unit，CU)和分布式单元(distributed unit，DU)，多个DU可以由一个CU集中控制。CU和DU可以根据其具备的无线网络的协议层功能进行划分，例如分组数据汇聚协议(packet data convergence protocol，PDCP)层及以上协议层的功能设置在CU，PDCP以下的协议层，例如无线链路控制(radio link control，RLC)层和介质访问控制(medium access control，MAC)层等的功能设置在DU。需要说明的是，这种协议层的划分仅仅是一种举例，还可以在其它协议层划分。射频装置可以拉远，不放在DU中，也可以集成在DU中，或者部分拉远部分集成在DU中，本申请实施例不作任何限制。另外，在一些实施例中，还可以将CU的控制面(control plan，CP)和用户面(user plan，UP)分离，分成不同实体来实现，分别为控制面CU实体(CU-CP实体)和用户面CU实体(CU-UP实体)。在该网络架构中，CU产生的信令可以通过DU发送给终端设备，或者UE产生的信令可以通过DU发送给CU。DU可以不对该信令进行解析而直接通过协议层封装而透传给UE或CU。在该网络架构中，将CU划分为无线接入网(radio access network，RAN)侧的网络设备，此外，也可以将CU划分作为核心网(core network，CN)侧的网络设备，本申请对此不做限制。
下面结合附图对本申请实施例提供的五种方案分别进行详细介绍。在下文的介绍过程中，以该方法应用于图4所示的通信系统为例。另外，该方法可由两个通信装置执行，这两个通信装置例如为第一通信装置和第二通信装置。为了便于介绍，在下文中，以该方法由网络设备和终端设备执行为例，也就是，以第一通信装置是终端设备，第二通信装置是网络设备为例。需要说明的是，图5以4-step RACH为例，但是图5中RNTI的设计同样适用于2-step RACH，即适用于MSGB-RNTI的设计。本文后续以RA-RNTI举例进行说明。MSGB-RNTI与RA-RNTI的重复之处，不多作介绍。图5所示的随机接入方法的流程描述 如下。
方案一，提供新的RNTI的设计，通过该设计确定的RNTI能够保证不同的RA-RNTI对应通过不同RO接入的终端设备，从而通过RA-RNTI能够区分不同的终端设备。例如，在本申请实施例中，针对RA-RNTI可设计一个偏移，不同的终端设备对应不同的偏移，从而通过RA-RNTI仍然可以区分不同RO接入的终端设备。网络设备和终端设备除了根据s_id、t_id、f_id和ul_carrier_id中的至少一项，还根据该偏移确定RA-RNTI。根据偏移的不同，RA-RNTI的设计方案也有所不同，下面介绍几种RA-RNTI的设计方案。
请参见图5，为本申请实施例提供的一种随机接入方法的流程图。
S501、终端设备在RO向网络设备发送preamble。
应理解，在随机接入过程中，终端设备可向网络设备发送preamble，具体可参考4-step RACH中step1的相关描述，这里不再赘述。
S502、网络设备根据第一信息确定RA-RNTI，并基于RA-RNTI对RAR消息进行加扰。
关于网络设备如何根据第一信息确定RA-RNTI将在下文中详细介绍。网络设备确定RA-RNTI之后，可基于该RA-RNTI对针对preamble的RAR进行加扰。
S503、网络设备向终端设备发送下行信道。
网络设备对RAR加扰之后，可向终端设备发送加扰后的RAR。例如，网络设备可向终端设备发送下行信道。该下行信道用于发送加扰后的RAR。该下行信道可为用于调度承载RAR的物理下行共享信道(physical downlink shared channe，PDSCH)的物理下行控制信道(physical downlink control channel，PDCCH)。
S504、终端设备根据第一信息确定RA-RNTI，并根据RA-RNTI接收来自网络设备的下行信道。
终端设备根据发送preamble的RO以及第一信息确定RA-RNTI，在发送preamble之后间隔一段时间开始在RAR窗监测网络设备使用该RA-RNTI标识的RAR。例如，终端设备根据RA-RNTI接收用于调度承载RAR的PDSCH的PDCCH。
在本申请实施例中，第一信息可用于指示RA-RNTI的偏移。网络设备检测到该preamble后，可根据接收preamble的RO对应的s_id、t_id、f_id和ul_carrier_id以及第一信息确定RA-RNTI，并根据该RA-RNTI对要发送给终端设备的RAR进行加扰。不同的终端设备可对应不同的偏移，从而通过RA-RNTI仍然可以区分不同RO接入的终端设备。需要说明的是，在不冲突的情况下，不同的终端设备可以是不同类型的终端设备，也可以是不同组的终端设备，或者是同一类型(或同一组)中不同的终端设备。
RA-RNTI的偏移可通过多种设计实现。例如，可通过设计s_id的偏移，t_id的偏移，f_id的偏移，或者ul_carrier_id的偏移使得RA-RNTI产生偏移。或者，也可以通过设计s_id、t_id、f_id和ul_carrier_id中至少两种的偏移使得RA-RNTI产生偏移。为方便描述，下文中，将s_id的偏移称为a，t_id的偏移称为b，f_id的偏移称为c，ul_carrier_id的偏移称为d。第一信息可以是a、b、c或d。或者，第一信息可包括a、b、c或d中的至少两个。或者，可认为a、b、c以及d是确定RA-RNTI的参数。例如，可将a称为第一参数(偏移)、b称为第二参数(偏移)，c称为第三参数(偏移)、d称为第四参数(偏移)。那么第一信息可包括第一参数、第二参数、第三参数以及第四参数中的一种或多种。根据第一信息的不同，RA-RNTI的设计方案也有所不同，下面介绍几种RA-RNTI的设计方案。
设计一，可为s_id设计偏移，即第一信息包括a。这种设计下，网络设备和终端设备 根据s_id、t_id、f_id和ul_carrier_id，以及s_id的偏移确定RA-RNTI。
为了保证preamble之间的正交性，通常会配置RO的时频资源不重叠，那么不同的RO的起始位置间隔至少preamble的时域资源的长度。例如，preamble的时域资源的长度为发送preamble所占用的时域资源的长度。时域资源的长度可为符号个数、时隙个数、子帧个数、帧个数或迷你时隙个数。例如，假设preamble的时域资源的长度为s1个时隙，不同的RO的起始位置间隔至少为s1个时隙。其中，preamble的时域资源的长度可以是网络设备配置的，例如网络设备配置随机接入信道配置信息，该随机接入信道配置信息可包括preamble的时域资源的长度。起始位置可为起始符号的索引、起始时隙的索引或起始子帧的索引。举例来说，s1＝1，那么多个RO的时域资源起始位置分别为第1个时隙的第0个符号、第2时隙的第0个符号、第3个时隙的第0个符号。对于正常CP来说，一个时隙包括14个符号。当公式(1-1)中的s_id为0，一个时隙中的其余13个符号并未使用，那么可通过这13个符号中不同符号索引计算的RA-RNTI来区分不同的终端设备。例如，不同的终端设备对应这14个符号中的不同符号索引，或不同符号索引的偏移，或不同的a。即可为s_id设计偏移，从而使得RA-RNTI产生偏移来区分不同的终端设备。举例来说，对于s_id、t_id、f_id以及ul_carrier_id都相同的两个终端设备UE1和UE2，网络设备向UE1发送第一信息，该第一信息用于指示UE1计算RNTI时使用a1；网络设备向UE2发送第一信息，该第一信息用于指示UE2计算RNTI时使用a2。a1和a2对应一个时隙中两个不同符号的索引，a1等于1，a2等于2。对于UE1来说，接收来自网络设备的第一信息，根据a1以及s_id、t_id、f_id和ul_carrier_id可确定RA-RNTI 1。同理，UE2接收来自网络设备的第一信息，根据a2以及s_id、t_id、f_id和ul_carrier_id可确定RA-RNTI 2。由于a1和a2不同，所以RA-RNTI 1和RA-RNTI 2不同，从而UE1和UE2的随机接入资源不会产生冲突。
又例如，preamble的时域资源的长度为s2个符号。s2可为大于1的整数。例如，s2为偶数。举例来说，s2＝2或s2＝4或s2＝6或s2＝12。不同的RO的起始位置间隔至少为s2个符号。举例来说，preamble的时域资源的长度为2个符号，那么多个RO的时域资源起始位置分别为第1个时隙的第0个符号、第1时隙的第2个符号、第1个时隙的第4个符号、第1个时隙的第6个符号，也就是说，多个RO的时域资源仅使用了第0、2、4和6这几个符号的索引来计算RNTI，而1、3、5和7对应的符号索引没有用于计算RNTI。假设公式(1-1)中，一个终端设备的s_id为偶数，那么s_id所在的时隙中的奇数符号索引并未使用。同理，假设公式(1-1)中一个终端设备的s_id为奇数，那么s_id所在的时隙中的偶数符号索引并未使用。因此，可通过奇数符号索引和偶数符号索引对应计算出的RNTI来分别对应不同的终端设备，或对应不同类型的终端设备。具体的，第一类终端设备的s_id、a或RA-RNTI为奇数，第二类终端设备的s_id、a或RA-RNTI为偶数，从而可以实现第一类终端设备和第二类终端设备对应不同的RNTI。例如，对于s_id、t_id、f_id以及ul_carrier_id相同的两类终端设备UE1和UE2，基站可以为UE1配置a1等于0，为UE2配置a2等于1，当s_id为0、2、4和6时，UE1根据s_id和a1计算得到的符号索引为偶数，UE2根据s_id和a2计算得到的符号索引为奇数，那么可以实现UE1和UE2对应的RNTI不同，从而防止两类UE的随机接入资源冲突。另外，通过奇数符号索引或偶数符号索引计算出的RNTI来区分不同的终端设备，不会增加RA-RNTI的最大值，即可避免出现RA-RNTI超范围的情况。
示例性的，RA-RNTI可满足公式(2)：
RA-RNTI＝1+s_id+a+14×t_id+14×80×f_id+14×80×8×ul_carrier_id      (2)
在公式(2)中，a是s_id的偏移，或者a是RA-RNTI的偏移。不同的终端设备，a的取值也不同，从而不同的终端设备对应不同的RA-RNTI。基于公式(2)确定的RA-RNTI可用于区分在不同RO接入的终端设备。
为方便理解，沿用图2所示的例子，终端设备1在BWP1上的RO-1发送preamble，终端设备2在BWP2上的RO-1发送preamble。假设终端设备1对应的a的取值为a1，终端设备2对应的a的取值为a2。假设BWP1上的RO-1对应的s_id和BWP2上的RO-1对应的s_id都为0，BWP1上的RO-1对应的ul_carrier_id和BWP2上的RO-1对应的ul_carrier_id都为0。假设BWP1上的RO-1对应的t_id为0，那么BWP2上的RO-1对应的t_id也为0。假设BWP1上的RO-1对应的f_id为0，BWP2上的RO-1对应的f_id为0。将终端设备1确定的RA-RNTI称为RA-RNTI 1，终端设备2确定的RA-RNTI称为RA-RNTI2。按照公式(2)有：
RA-RNTI 1＝1+0+a1+14×0+14×80×0+14×80×8×0＝a1+1。
RA-RNTI 2＝1+0+a2+14×0+14×80×0+14×80×8×0＝a2+1。
如果a1不等于a2，那么RA-RNTI 1和RA-RNTI 2的取值也不同。即不同的终端设备对应的a的取值不同，即使不同的终端设备发送preamble的RO的时域资源相同，且该RO的频域资源的索引相同，不同的终端设备使用的RO对应的RA-RNTI也不同。所以本申请实施例中，基于公式(2)确定的RA-RNTI，可区分不同RO接入的终端设备。即保证加扰后的RAR和RO有对应关系。例如，加扰后的RAR和RO一一对应，从而保证各个终端设备接收正确的RAR。同理，沿用图4的例子，不同类型或不同组的终端设备对应的a的取值不同，按照公式(2)确定的RA-RNTI，也可区分不同RO接入的不同类型或不同组的终端设备。
对于正常循环前缀(cyclic prefix，CP)，每个时隙包括14个OFDM符号。如果a与s_id之和大于或等于14，那么会出现计算出的RA-RNTI和用下一个时隙中符号计算出的RA-RNTI相同的情况。所以本申请实施例中，a与s_id之和小于14。同理，对于扩展CP，每个时隙包括13个OFDM符号，a与s_id之和小于13。
在可能的实现方式中，a的最大值或a的取值范围与以下至少一种参数相关：preamble的长度、preamble的时域资源的长度(在本文中也称为PRACH的长度)，RO所在的BWP的配置。preamble是一个ZC序列，该ZC序列的长度L，即preamble的长度L可为839或139或者其他可能的长度，在本文中以preamble的长度为839或139为例。preamble的时域资源的长度，可为发送preamble的时域资源所占符号的个数，或者发送preamble的时域资源所占时隙的个数。RO所在的BWP的配置包括该BWP中的信号的CP类型，例如正常CP，或扩展CP。网络设备可为各个终端设备配置的a的取值不超过a的最大值。不同类型或不同组的终端设备对应的a的取值不同，或者，不同的终端设备对应的a的取值不同。
示例一，a的最大值可根据preamble的长度L确定。
具体的，可以预定义preamble的长度为第一长度范围时，对应a的最大值为第一取值，preamble的长度为第二长度范围时，对应a的最大值为第二取值。例如，preamble的长度L＝839时，s_id的取值始终为0。a的最大值为13，也可认为a的取值范围为[0,13]。a的 取值范围为[0,13]，那么最多可用于区分14个或14种类型的终端设备。又例如，preamble的长度L＝139时，s_id的取值始终为偶数，或者s_id的取值始终为奇数。a的最大值可为奇数，例如a的最大值可为1或3或5或11。
为方便理解，请参见图6，假设有4个终端设备，这4个终端设备为终端设备1、终端设备2、终端设备3和终端设备4。这4个终端设备发送preamble使用的PRACH的起始符号均为符号#0。假设终端设备1在计算RA-RNTI时，a＝0。终端设备2在计算RA-RNTI时，a＝1。终端设备3在计算RA-RNTI时，a＝2。终端设备4在计算RA-RNTI时，a＝3。根据公式(2)，终端设备1确定的RA-RNTI为RA-RNTI 1。终端设备2确定的RA-RNTI为RA-RNTI 1+1。终端设备3确定的RA-RNTI为RA-RNTI 1+2。终端设备4确定的RA-RNTI为RA-RNTI 1+3。即终端设备1～终端设备4计算出的RA-RNTI不同，从而通过RA-RNTI可区分不同的终端设备。需要说明的是，不同的终端设备可为不同类型的终端设备，不同特性的终端设备，或者支持不同业务的终端设备。或者，不同的终端设备为类型、特性以及业务中至少两种不同的终端设备。例如，终端设备1为legacy终端设备，终端设备2为低复杂度终端设备，终端设备3为支持覆盖增强的legacy终端设备，终端设备4为支持覆盖增强的低复杂度终端设备。
示例二，a的最大值或a的取值范围可根据preamble的时域资源的长度确定。
a的最大值小于preamble的时域资源的长度。例如，preamble的时域资源的长度为2个符号，那么a的最大值可为1，即a的取值范围为[0,1]。又例如，preamble的时域资源的长度为1个时隙，那么a的最大值可为0至13中的一个取值，即a的取值范围为[0,13]。
示例三，a的最大值也可根据RO所在的BWP的配置确定。
例如，RO所在的BWP的配置为正常CP，那么a的最大值为13，即a的取值范围为[0,13]。RO所在的BWP的配置指的是扩展CP，那么a的最大值为12，即a的取值范围为[0,12]。
示例四，a的最大值可根据preamble的长度L以及preamble的时域资源的长度确定。
例如，L＝139，preamble的时域资源的长度为N个符号。例如，a的最大值可为小于或等于(N-1)的整数，或a的取值范围为[1，N-1]，可用于区分N个终端设备或N种类型的终端设备。
为方便理解，请参见图7，假设PRACH的长度为2个符号。有2个终端设备，这2个终端设备为终端设备1和终端设备2。终端设备1和终端设备2发送preamble使用的PRACH的起始符号都为奇数，那么终端设备1在计算RA-RNTI时，a＝0。终端设备2在计算RA-RNTI时，a＝1。按照公式(2)，如果终端设备1确定的RA-RNTI为RA-RNTI 1，那么终端设备2确定的RA-RNTI为RA-RNTI 1+1。即终端设备1～终端设备2计算出的RA-RNTI不同，从而通过RA-RNTI可区分不同的终端设备。
示例五，a的最大值可根据RO所在的BWP的配置以及preamble的时域资源的长度确定。
a的最大值可根据preamble的时域资源的长度与RO所在的BWP中的信号的CP包括的符号个数的乘积确定。例如，RO所在的BWP的配置为正常CP，preamble的时域资源的长度为L个时隙，a的最大值可为L×14-1。L是正整数，例如，L为1，3，4，或者其他可能的值。需要说明的是，这种情况下，第一信息无需包括b，即通过a来使得RA-RNTI产生偏移。如果第一信息包括a和b，那么a的最大值可为13。通过b的最大值来联合指 示不同的RA-RNTI偏移或RA-RNTI参数。
示例六，a的最大值可根据preamble的长度L、RO所在的BWP的配置以及preamble的时域资源的长度确定。
例如，L＝839，a的最大值可根据preamble的时域资源的长度与RO所在的BWP中的信号的CP包括的符号个数的乘积确定。假设preamble的时域资源的长度为L个时隙，RO所在的BWP的配置为正常CP，那么a的最大值可为L×14-1。L是正整数，例如，L为1，3，4，或者其他可能的值。需要说明的是，这种情况下，第一信息无需包括b，即通过a来使得RA-RNTI产生偏移。如果第一信息包括a和b，那么a的最大值可为13。通过b的最大值来联合指示不同的RA-RNTI偏移或RA-RNTI参数。
设计二：为t_id设计偏移，即第一信息包括b。该设计方案下，网络设备和终端设备除了根据s_id、t_id、f_id和ul_carrier_id，还根据t_id的偏移确定RA-RNTI。
为了保证preamble之间的正交性，通常会配置RO的时频资源不重叠，那么不同的RO的起始位置间隔至少preamble的时域资源的长度。当preamble的时域资源的长度大于1个时隙，按照公式(1-1)计算RA-RNTI时，有t_id没有被使用。因此，可通过t_id的偏移，或不同时隙索引计算的RA-RNTI来区分不同的终端设备。例如，当preamble的SCS为15kHz，1个无线帧内的时隙个数为10。因而，RA-RNTI计算时t-id的取值范围可以为[0,9]之间的任意值。然而公式(1-1)中是按照1个无线帧包括80个时隙计算的，因而至少有70个t_id没有被使用。即t_id中0至9可能被使用，t_id中10至79未被使用。这种情况下，可为t_id设计偏移，不同的终端设备对应的t_id的偏移不同，从而使得RA-RNTI产生偏移来区分不同的终端设备。
示例性的，RA-RNTI可满足公式(3)：
RA-RNTI＝1+s_id+14×(t_id+b)+14×80×f_id+14×80×8×ul_carrier_id     (3)
在公式(3)中，b为t_id的偏移，也可认为14×b是RA-RNTI的偏移。不同的终端设备对应的b的取值不同，或者不同类型或不同组的终端设备对应的b的取值不同。
为方便理解，沿用图2所示的例子，终端设备1在BWP1上的RO-1发送preamble，终端设备2在BWP2上的RO-1发送preamble。假设终端设备1对应的b的取值为b1，终端设备2对应的b的取值为b2。假设BWP1上的RO-1对应的s_id和BWP2上的RO-1对应的s_id都为0，BWP1上的RO-1对应的ul_carrier_id和BWP2上的RO-1对应的ul_carrier_id都为0。假设BWP1上的RO-1对应的t_id为0，那么BWP2上的RO-1对应的t_id也为0。假设BWP1上的RO-1对应的f_id为0，BWP2上的RO-1对应的f_id为0。将终端设备1确定的RA-RNTI称为RA-RNTI 1，将终端设备2确定的RA-RNTI称为RA-RNTI 2。按照公式(3)有：
RA-RNTI 1＝1+0+14×(0+b1)+14×80×0+14×80×8×0＝14×b1+1。
RA-RNTI 2＝1+0+14×(0+b2)+14×80×0+14×80×8×0＝14×b2+1。
如果b1不等于b2，RA-RNTI 1和RA-RNTI 2的取值也不同。即不同的终端设备对应的b的取值可不同，即使不同的终端设备发送preamble的RO的时域资源相同，以及该RO的频域资源的索引相同，不同的终端设备使用的RO对应的RA-RNTI也不同。因此，本申请实施例可基于公式(3)确定的RA-RNTI，可区分不同RO接入的终端设备。即保证加扰后的RAR和RO有对应关系，保证各个终端设备接收正确的RAR。同理，沿用图4的例子，不同类型或不同组的终端设备对应的b的取值不同，按照公式(3)确定的 RA-RNTI，也可区分不同RO接入的不同类型或不同组的终端设备。
应理解，RNTI按照一个10ms的无线帧包括80个时隙预留间隔，如果b与t_id之和大于或等于80，那么会出现使用上一个无线帧中的时隙计算出的RA-RNTI和使用下一个无线帧中的时隙计算出的RA-RNTI相同的情况。所以本申请实施例中，b与t_id之和小于80。在可能的实现方式中，b的最大值与以下至少一种参数相关：preamble的SCS，preamble的长度，preamble的时域资源的长度，一个无线帧包括的可用于发送preamble的时隙数，一个子帧包括的可用于发送preamble的时隙数。网络设备可为各个终端设备配置的b的取值不超过b的最大值。不同类型或不同组的终端设备对应的b的取值不同，或者，不同的终端设备对应的b的取值不同。
示例一，b的最大值或b的取值范围可根据preamble的SCS来确定。例如，b＝10×n1，n1为整数。例如，n1为小于或等于7的整数。举例来说，当SCS等于15kHz时，1个无线帧包括10个时隙，b可为0，10，20，30，40，50，60或70。例如，b＝20×n2，n2为正整数。例如，n2为小于4的整数。举例来说，当SCS等于30kHz时，1个无线帧包括20个时隙，b可为0，20，40或60。例如，b＝40×n3，n3为正整数。例如，n3为小于2的整数。例如，当SCS等于60kHz时，1个子帧包括40个时隙，b可为0或40。
示例二，b的最大值或b的取值范围可根据preamble的长度L确定。例如，preamble的长度L＝839时，b的最大值可为4，即b的取值范围为[0,4]。preamble的长度L＝139时，b的最大值可为1，即b的取值范围为[0,1]。
示例三，b的最大值或b的取值范围可根据发送preamble的时域资源的长度确定。示例性的，b的最大值小于preamble的时域资源的长度。例如，preamble的时域资源的长度为3个时隙，那么b的最大值可为2或1，即b的取值范围为[0,2]或[0,1]。又例如，preamble的时域资源的长度为4个时隙，那么b的最大值可为3或2或1。即b的取值范围为[0,3]，[0,2]，或[0,1]。
示例四，b的最大值或b的取值范围也可根据一个无线帧包括的可用于发送preamble的时隙数确定。例如，一个无线帧包括的可用于发送preamble的时隙数为3，那么b的最大值可为2，即b的取值范围为[0,2]。
示例五，b的最大值或b的取值范围也可根据一个子帧包括的可用于发送preamble的时隙数确定。例如，一个子帧包括的可用于发送preamble的时隙数为2，那么b的最大值可为1，即b的取值范围为[0,1]。
示例六，b的最大值或b的取值范围可根据preamble的时域资源的长度以及一个无线帧包括的可用于发送preamble的时隙数确定。b的最大值小于preamble的时域资源的长度和一个无线帧包括的可用于发送preamble的时隙数。例如，preamble的时域资源的长度为3个时隙，一个无线帧包括的可用于发送preamble的时隙数为3，那么b的最大值可为2。即b的取值范围为[0,2]。又例如，preamble的时域资源的长度为2个时隙，一个无线帧包括的可用于发送preamble的时隙数为3，那么b的最大值可为1。即b的取值范围为[0,1]。
前述RNTI的第一种设计和第二种设计旨在使得RNTI产生偏移，从而能够区分针对不同的终端设备或不同类型的终端设备。作为可替换的方案，也可以为f_id或ul_carrier_id设计偏移，使得RNTI产生偏移。即如下的第三种RNTI的设计方案和第四种RNTI的设计方案。
设计三：为f_id设计偏移，即第一信息包括c。该设计方案下，网络设备和终端设备 除了根据s_id、t_id、f_id和ul_carrier_id，还根据f_id的偏移确定RA-RNTI。
示例性的，RA-RNTI满足公式(4)：
RA-RNTI＝1+s_id+14×t_id+14×80×(f_id+c)+14×80×8×ul_carrier_id     (4)
在公式(4)中，c为f_id的偏移，也可认为14×80×c是RA-RNTI的偏移。如果c与f_id之和大于或等于8，那么会出现使用不同载波ul_carrier_id计算出的RA-RNTI相同的情况。因此，c与f_id之和小于8。不同的终端设备对应的c的取值不同，或者不同类型或不同组的终端设备对应的c的取值不同。即使不同的终端设备发送preamble的RO的时域资源相同，以及该RO的频域资源的索引相同，不同的终端设备使用的RO对应的RA-RNTI也不同。
例如，假设图2中，终端设备1在BWP1上的RO-1发送preamble，终端设备2在BWP2上的RO-1发送preamble。假设终端设备1对应的c的取值为c1，终端设备2对应的c的取值为c2。假设BWP1上的RO-1对应的s_id和BWP2上的RO-1对应的s_id都为0，BWP1上的RO-1对应的ul_carrier_id和BWP2上的RO-1对应的ul_carrier_id都为0。假设BWP1上的RO-1对应的t_id为0，那么BWP2上的RO-1对应的t_id也为0。假设BWP1上的RO-1对应的f_id为0，BWP2上的RO-1对应的f_id为0。由于BWP1上的RO-1和BWP2上的RO-1的时域资源相同，所以沿用现有设计可知终端设备1和终端设备2对应的RAR检测窗监测的起始时间相同。将终端设备1确定的RA-RNTI称为RA-RNTI 1，将终端设备2确定的RA-RNTI称为RA-RNTI 2。按照公式(4)有：
RA-RNTI 1＝1+0+14×0+14×80×(0+c1)+14×80×8×0＝14×80×c1+1。
RA-RNTI 2＝1+0+14×0+14×80×(0+c1)+14×80×8×0＝14×80×c2+1。
如果c1不等于c2，RA-RNTI 1和RA-RNTI 2的取值也不同。可见，由于不同的终端设备对应的c的取值不同，即使不同的终端设备发送preamble的RO的时域资源相同，以及该RO的频域资源的索引相同，不同的终端设备使用的RO对应的RA-RNTI也不同。所以，可基于公式(4)确定的RA-RNTI，可区分不同RO接入的终端设备。同理，沿用图4的例子，不同类型或不同组的终端设备对应的c的取值不同，按照公式(4)确定的RA-RNTI，也可区分不同RO接入的不同类型或不同组的终端设备。
设计四：为ul_carrier_id设计偏移，即第一信息包括d。该设计方案下，网络设备和终端设备除了根据s_id、t_id、f_id和ul_carrier_id，还根据ul_carrier_id的偏移确定RA-RNTI。
示例性的，RA-RNTI满足公式(5)：
RA-RNTI＝1+s_id+14×t_id+14×80×f_id+14×80×8×(ul_carrier_id+d)     (5)
在公式(5)中，d可认为是ul_carrier_id的偏移，14×80×8×ul_carrier_id可认为是第一RNTI的偏移。如果d与ul_carrier_id之和大于或等于3，会出现计算出的RA-RNTI范围超过最大允许范围的情况。因此，d与ul_carrier_id之和小于3。不同的终端设备对应的d的取值不同，或者不同类型或不同组的终端设备对应的d的取值不同。即使不同的终端设备发送preamble的RO的时域资源相同，以及该RO的频域资源的索引相同，不同的终端设备使用的RO对应的RA-RNTI也不同。
公式(2)至公式(5)以通过设计s_id、t_id、f_id以及ul_carrier_id这4种参数的一种参数的偏移，来使得RA-RNTI产生偏移，以区分不同RO上接入的终端设备，或者区分不同类型或不同组的终端设备。
作为另一种可替换的方案，可设计s_id、t_id、f_id以及ul_carrier_id中至少两种的偏 移，使得RA-RNTI产生偏移，来区分终端设备。即如下的第五种RA-RNTI的设计方案。
设计五：为s_id、t_id、f_id以及ul_carrier_id中至少两种设计偏移。该设计方案下，网络设备和终端设备根据s_id、t_id、f_id和ul_carrier_id，以及s_id、t_id、f_id和ul_carrier_id中至少两种偏移确定RA-RNTI。
示例性的，RA-RNTI满足公式(6)：
RA-RNTI＝1+s_id+a+14×(t_id+b)+14×80×(f_id+c)+14×80×8×(ul_carrier_id+d)     (6)
应理解，公式(2)至公式(5)可认为是公式(6)的变形。也就是，公式(2)可认为是公式(6)中b＝0、c＝0和d＝0，或认为是公式(6)中b、c和d不存在。公式(3)可认为是公式(6)中a＝0、c＝0和d＝0，或认为是公式(6)中a、c和d不存在。公式(4)可认为是公式(6)中a＝0、b＝0和d＝0，或认为是公式(6)中a、b和d不存在。公式(5)可认为是公式(6)中a＝0、b＝0和c＝0，或认为是公式(6)中a、b和c不存在。
在公式(6)中，只要存在a-d中的一种或多种，RA-RNTI的取值都会发生变化。终端设备和网络设备可根据s_id、t_id、f_id和ul_carrier_id，以及a、b、c和d中的一种或多种来确定RA-RNTI。即第一信息可包括a、b、c和d中的一种或多种。
如果第一信息包括a、b、c和d中的多种，那么不同的终端设备对应的第一信息中至少一种偏移的取值不同。即只要不同终端设备对应的第一信息所导致的RA-RNTI不同即可。例如，第一信息包括两种设计偏移。两种偏移为a和b。不同的终端设备对应的a相同，b不相同；或者，不同的终端设备对应的b相同，a不相同；或者，不同的终端设备对应的b不相同，a不相同。举例来说，在公式(6)中，c和d等于0，或c和d在公式中不存在。那么RA-RNTI满足公式(7)：
RA-RNTI＝1+(s_id+a)+14×(t_id+b)+14×80×f_id+14×80×8×ul_carrier_id     (7)
针对公式(7)，不同终端设备的a、b取值中至少有一项不同。假设存在终端设备1、终端设备2、终端设备3和终端设备4。那么可有，对终端设备1来说，a＝0，b＝0；对终端设备2来说，a＝7，b＝0；对终端设备3来说，a＝0，b＝1；对终端设备4来说，a＝7，b＝1。
又例如，第一信息包括三种设计偏移。三种偏移为a、b、d。不同的终端设备对应的a、b和c中至少有一项不相同。或不同的终端设备对应的a、b和d均不相同。举例来说，在公式(6)中，c＝0，或c在公式中不存在。那么RA-RNTI满足公式(8)：
RA-RNTI＝1+(s_id+a)+14×(t_id+b)+14×80×f_id+14×80×8×(ul_carrier_id+d)     (8)
针对公式(8)，不同的终端设备的a、b、c取值中至少有一项不同。假设存在终端设备1、终端设备2、终端设备3、终端设备4、终端设备5和终端设备6。那么可有，对终端设备1来说，a＝0，b＝0，d＝0。对终端设备2来说，a＝1，b＝0，d＝0。对终端设备3来说，a＝1，b＝1，d＝0。对终端设备4来说，a＝0，b＝0，d＝1。对终端设备5来说，a＝1，b＝0，d＝1。对终端设备6说，a＝1，b＝1，d＝1。
又例如，第一信息包括四种设计偏移。四种偏移为a、b、d和d。不同的终端设备对应的a、b、c和d中至少有一项不相同。或不同的终端设备对应的a、b和d均不相同。举例来说，在公式(6)中，c 0，或c在公式中不存在。那么RA-RNTI满足公式(9)：
RA-RNTI＝1+s_id+a+14×(t_id+b)+14×80×(f_id+c)+14×80×8×(ul_carrier_id+d)    (9)
假设存在终端设备1、终端设备2、终端设备3、终端设备4、终端设备5和终端设备6。那么可有，对终端设备1来说，a＝0，b＝0，c＝0，d＝0。对终端设备2来说，a＝1，b＝0，c＝0，d＝0。对终端设备3来说，a＝1，b＝1，c＝0，d＝1。对终端设备4来说，a＝0，b＝0，c＝1。 d＝0。对终端设备5来说，a＝1，b＝0，c＝1，d＝0。对终端设备6来说，a＝1，b＝1，c＝1，d＝1。
各个终端设备发送preamble后，可根据第一信息以及s_id、t_id、f_id和ul_carrier_id确定RA-RNTI，以在RAR窗监测网络设备使用该RA-RNTI标识的RAR。即根据该RA-RNTI接收RAR。网络设备和各个终端设备可根据预设规则确定第一信息，或者，网络设备也可以通过信令指示各个终端设备的第一信息。
作为一种示例，网络设备可向终端设备发送第一信息。例如，网络设备向终端设备发送包括第一信息的系统信息或配置信息。例如，系统信息为系统消息块(system information block，SIB)1。例如，配置信息包括随机接入信道配置信息或BWP配置信息。换句话说，网络设备可复用随机接入信道配置(RACH-config)信息或BWP配置信息来指示第一信息。
例如，随机接入信道配置信息包括第一信息。可预先定义终端设备的类型与随机接入信道配置信息的对应关系。网络设备向终端设备发送第一信息时，网络设备可发送系统信息，该系统信息包括多套随机接入信道配置信息。任一类型的终端设备可根据终端设备的类型与随机接入信道配置信息的对应关系，确定自己对应的随机接入信道配置信息。从而该类型的终端设备根据所确定的随机接入信道配置信息中的第一信息确定RA-RNTI。如果某个类型的终端设备发现预定义的对应关系中没有与自己匹配的类型，那么该类型的终端设备可按照预定义的规则选择相应的随机接入信道配置信息。例如，可默认与某一类型的终端设备对应的随机接入信道配置信息，同样适用于另一类型的终端设备，这样的好处是可以节约配置资源，提高系统效率。举例来说，第一类终端设备的随机接入信道配置信息为随机接入信道配置信息1，第二类终端设备的随机接入信道配置信息为随机接入信道配置信息2。可预定义随机接入信道配置信息1同样适用于第三类终端设备。第三类终端设备根据终端设备的类型与随机接入信道配置信息的对应关系发现没有与自己匹配的随机接入信道配置信息，那么第三类终端设备可选择随机接入信道配置信息1。
又例如，第一信息携带在BWP配置信息内。不同类型的终端设备的BWP配置信息包括不同的第一信息。例如，存在第一类终端设备和第二类终端设备。网络设备为第一类终端设备配置BWP配置信息1，网络设备为第二类终端设备配置BWP配置信息2。BWP配置信息1包括a，BWP配置信息2包括b。第一类终端设备根据BWP配置信息1中的a确定RA-RNTI。第二类终端设备根据BWP配置信息2中的b确定RA-RNTI。
或者，相同类型的终端设备的不同BWP配置信息包括不同的第一信息。沿用图3的例子，终端设备1和终端设备2为相同类型的终端设备。网络设备为终端设备1配置BWP配置信息1，网络设备为终端设备2配置BWP配置信息2。BWP配置信息1包括a，BWP配置信息2包括b。终端设备1根据BWP配置信息1中的a确定RA-RNTI。终端设备2根据BWP配置信息2中的b确定RA-RNTI。
或者，不同类型的终端设备的BWP配置信息包括相同的第一信息，但是不同类型的终端设备对应的第一信息的取值不同。例如，网络设备为第一类终端设备配置的BWP配置信息1包括a，网络设备为第二类终端设备配置的BWP配置信息2也包括a。BWP配置信息1中的a＝1，BWP配置信息2中的a＝2。第一类终端设备根据BWP配置信息1中的a确定RA-RNTI。第二类终端设备根据BWP配置信息2中的a确定RA-RNTI。
作为另一种示例，终端设备和网络设备可根据预设规则确定第一信息。例如，可预定义第一信息和BWP ID之间的对应关系。例如，可定义第一信息等于BWP ID。以第一信息是a为例。如果BWP1ID为1，那么a＝1。如果BWP1ID为2，那么a＝2。
又例如，可预定义第一信息和BWP大小之间的对应关系。以第一信息包括a为例。例如，可定义BWP大于第一门限时，a＝0；BWP小于或等于第一门限时，a＝1。例如，第一门限值为20MHz。
示例性的，第一信息与以下至少一项特征参量相关：终端设备的类型，终端设备的能力、终端设备的复杂度、终端设备的带宽、终端设备的天线数、消息3的传输类型、数据的传输类型、切片能力指示、BWP配置信息、重要任务通信(mission critical communication)、功率节省需求以及时延需求等。下面分别介绍各个特征参量。
终端设备的类型，例如包括eMBB终端设备、非eMBB终端设备、超高可靠性超低时延通信(ultra-reliable low-latency communication，URLLC)终端设备、低复杂度终端设备、非低复杂度终端设备、CE终端设备、SDT终端设备，功率节省终端设备、侧行链路终端设备、非陆地通信终端设备、专网终端设备或RAN slicing终端设备等。
终端设备的能力也可以认为是终端设备的能力信息，用于指示终端设备的能力。例如，终端设备的能力可包括覆盖增强传输、上行覆盖增强传输、下行覆盖增强传输、小数据传输、低频谱效率调制编码方式表格、上行低频谱效率调制编码方式表格、下行低频谱效率调制编码方式表格、新的信道状态指示表格、终端设备处理时间、BWP调谐、BWP外跳频、BWP外测量、物理下行共享信道支持的最大多入多出(multiple-input multiple-output，MIMO)层数中的至少一种。终端设备处理时间为终端设备处理时间能力1和终端设备处理时间能力2中的至少一种。例如，BWP调谐为仅BWP位置改变。BWP位置为BWP起始资源位置、BWP起始资源块(resource block，RB)指示和BWP中心频点中的至少一种。例如，BWP外跳频为跳频传输的至少两跳之间的跳频间隔超过BWP带宽，或跳频传输的至少一跳在BWP外。例如，BWP外测量为信道状态测量在BWP外，或移动性测量在BWP外，或时频同步测量在BWP外、或同步信号模块接收在BWP外。
终端设备的带宽为终端设备的最大信道带宽、终端设备的最大传输带宽、终端设备的射频带宽和终端设备的基带带宽中的至少一项。终端设备的天线数为终端设备的接收天线数和终端设备的发送天线数中的至少一项。消息3的传输类型，包括重复传输或不重复传输。数据的传输类型，即终端设备要发送的数据的传输类型，可包括重复传输或不重复传输。切片能力指示可指示终端设备是否具有切片功能。BWP配置信息为终端设备配置的BWP标识(identifier，ID)、BWP大小中的至少一种。BWP的大小为BWP的频域资源的长度、BWP的频域宽度、BWP包括的资源个数或BWP包括的RB个数。
不同的终端设备具有的特征参量可能相同，也可能不同。具有不同特征参量的终端设备关联的第一信息可能相同，也可能不同。具有相同特征参量的终端设备关联的第一信息可能相同，也可能不同。下面介绍第一信息和如上一种或多种特征参量的关联关系。
示例性的，特征参量为如下的一种或多种：终端设备的类型、终端设备的能力、终端设备的复杂度、终端设备的带宽、终端设备的天线数、终端设备要发送的消息3的传输类型、终端设备要发送的数据的传输类型、终端设备要发送的数据的传输类型、终端设备的切片能力指示、BWP大小，以及BWP ID时，第一信息可以是a、b、c或d，只要通过a、b、c或d足够来区分不同的终端设备或不同类型的终端设备即可。
不同的第一信息关联的特征参量集合不同。特征参量集合包含一种或多种特征参量。例如，有终端设备1和终端设备2，终端设备1为低复杂度终端设备，终端设备2为非低复杂度终端设备。终端设备1关联的第一信息可为a，终端设备2关联的第一信息可为b。
不同特征参量关联的第一信息的取值可不同。例如，有终端设备1和终端设备2，终端设备1为低复杂度终端设备，终端设备2为非低复杂度终端设备。假设第一信息为a。终端设备1关联的a的取值可为a1，终端设备2关联的a的取值可为a2。a1不等于a2，a1和a2均为整数。或者，同种特征参量的多个终端设备中，不同的终端设备关联的第一信息的取值不同。假设第一信息为b。终端设备1关联的b的取值可为b1，终端设备2关联的b的取值可为b2。b1不等于b2，b1和b2均为整数。
网络设备根据终端设备的至少一种特征参量可确定第一信息，并为该终端设备配置所确定的第一信息。例如，存在4个终端设备，这4个终端设备包括终端设备1、终端设备2、终端设备3和终端设备4。其中，终端设备1和终端设备2均为leagcy终端设备，终端设备3和终端设备4均为REDCAP终端设备。即终端设备1和终端设备2属于同一种类型的终端设备，终端设备3和终端设备4属于同一种类型的终端设备。网络设备如果按照终端设备的类型来确定第一信息，那么网络设备可配置两套随机接入配置信息。每套随机接入配置信息包括不同的第一信息。例如，第一套随机接入配置信息用于确定终端设备1和终端设备2的RA-RNTI。第二套随机接入配置信息用于确定终端设备3和终端设备4的RA-RNTI。以第一信息包括a为例。第一套随机接入配置信息包括a，a＝0；第二套随机接入配置信息包括a，a＝1。或者，第一套随机接入配置信息不包括a；第二套随机接入配置信息包括a，a＝1。或者，第一套随机接入配置信息包括a，a＝1；第二套随机接入配置信息包括a，a＝2。以第一信息包括a和b为例，第一套随机接入配置信息包括a和b，a＝1，b＝1；第二套随机接入配置信息包括a和b，a＝2，b＝2。
在方案一中，RA-RNTI与终端设备的至少一项特征参量相关联。沿用现有技术中RA-RNTI或MSGB-RNTI的设计，为s_id、t_id、f_id和ul_carrier_id中的一种或多种设计偏移，使得RA-RNTI或MSGB-RNTI产生偏移。不同的终端设备，或者不同类型的终端设备的偏移不同，从而可区分不同的终端设备，也可以区分不同类型的终端设备。
下面介绍本申请实施例提供的方案二、即沿用现有技术中RA-RNTI或MGSB-RNTI的设计，但是不同的终端设备对应的RAR窗的起始位置不同。即使不同的终端设备发送preamble的RO的时域资源相同，且该RO的频域资源的索引相同，不同的终端设备发送preamble的RO对应的RA-RNTI或MGSB-RNTI不同。因此，方案二中可通过RAR窗的起始位置来区分不同的终端设备，也可以区分不同类型的终端设备。下文以RA-RNTI为例，MSGB-RNTI类似，不再赘述。
方案二，提供一种RAR窗的起始位置的设计
请参见图8，为本申请实施例提供的一种随机接入方法的流程图。在下文的介绍过程中，以该方法应用于图5所示的通信系统为例。另外，该方法可由两个通信装置执行，这两个通信装置例如为第一通信装置和第二通信装置。为了便于介绍，在下文中，以该方法由网络设备和终端设备执行为例，也就是，以第一通信装置是终端设备，第二通信装置是网络设备为例。图8所示的随机接入方法为4步随机接入方法，即图8所示实施例所涉及的RNTI为RA-RNTI。需要说明的是，图8以4步随机接入方法为例，但是也适用于2步随机接入过程。图8所示的随机接入方法的流程描述如下。
S801、终端设备在RO向网络设备发送preamble。
应理解，S801与前述的S501相同，这里不再赘述。
S802、网络设备确定RA-RNTI，并基于RA-RNTI对RAR消息进行加扰。
与S502的不同之处在于，网络设备可以根据公式(1)确定RA-RNTI。即网络设备可以沿用现有技术中计算RA-RNTI的方式来确定RA-RNTI。
S803、网络设备确定RAR窗的起始位置，并向终端设备发送RAR消息。
S804、终端设备根据第二信息确定RAR窗的起始位置，并接收来自网络设备的RAR消息。
第二信息可用于指示RAR窗的起始位置的偏移。偏移的单位可以是ms、符号、时隙、子帧或搜索空间的周期。现有技术中，RAR窗的起始位置为PRACH的最后一个符号之后的1个符号后的第一个控制资源集(control resource set，CORESET)的第一个符号。也就是说，RAR窗的起始位置可以理解为时域起始资源的位置、RAR窗的第一个符号的索引、RAR窗的第一个时隙的索引、RAR窗的第一个子帧的索引或RAR窗的第一个迷你时隙的索引。本申请实施例中，RAR窗的起始位置的偏移粒度可以是符号，也可以是时隙等。例如，RAR窗的起始位置的偏移可包括但不限于以下三种。
示例一，RAR窗的起始位置可以为PRACH的最后一个符号之后的M1个符号后的第一个CORESET的第一个符号。其中，M1为大于或等于1的整数，用于指示RAR窗的起始位置的偏移。相较于现有技术，RAR窗的起始位置偏移了M1-1个符号。第二信息可包括M1，可间接指示RAR窗的起始位置偏移的符号个数，即M1-1。或者，M1＝1+offset，第二信息可包括offset，指示RAR窗的起始位置偏移的符号个数。
示例二，RAR窗的起始位置可为RPACH的最后一个符号之后的M2个符号后的第一个CORESET的第一个符号。其中，M2＝1+14×offset_s，也可用于指示RAR窗的起始位置的偏移。与示例一不同之处在于，本示例中，RAR窗的起始位置的偏移以时隙为粒度。第二信息可包括M2，间接指示RAR窗的起始位置偏移的时隙个数，即(M2-1)/14。或者，第二信息可指示offset_s，直接指示RAR窗的起始位置偏移的时隙个数，即offset_s。
示例三，RAR窗的起始位置可为RPACH的最后一个符号后的1个符号后的第M3个CORESET的第一个符号。其中，M3为大于1的整数，用于指示RAR窗的起始位置的偏移。与示例一和示例二的不同之处在于，在本示例中，RAR窗的起始位置偏移了M3-1个CORESET。第二信息可包括M3，可间接指示RAR窗的起始位置偏移的CORESET个数，即M3-1。或者，M3＝1+offset，第二信息可包括offset，可直接指示RAR窗的起始位置偏移的CORESET个数。
本申请实施例通过为RAR窗的起始位置设计偏移，可以使得不同终端设备的RAR窗的起始位置不同，进而使得不同终端设备的RAR窗的时域范围不同。应理解，RAR窗的时域范围根据RAR窗的起始位置和RAR窗的长度确定。RAR窗的长度为在RAR窗所占用的时间，如10ms。需要说明的是，不同RAR窗的时域范围不同指的是不同RAR窗在时域上无重叠。也认为，两个RAR窗的时域范围有重叠，那么这两个RAR窗为相同的RAR窗。由于RAR窗的时域范围不同，这样即使不同终端设备计算的RA-RNTI相同，也能够区分属于自己的RAR，可以避免随机接入资源冲突，从而提高通信效率。通过本申请实施例也可以使得在相同RAR窗内，不同终端设备对应的RA-RNTI取值范围不同，通过RA-RNTI的取值范围也可以区分不同的终端设备，避免随机接入资源冲突，从而提高通信效率。
举例来说，请参见图9，为两组RO以及RAR窗示意图。在图9中，BWP1为终端设备1的初始上行BWP，BWP2为终端设备2的初始上行BWP。图9包括两组RO，称为第 一组RO和第二组RO。第一组RO包括BWP1上的4个RO以及BWP2上的4个RO，第二组RO也包括BWP1上的4个RO以及BWP2上的4个RO。不同之处在于，两组RO的时域资源不同。例如，第一组RO对应的t_id的取值范围为0～9，第二组RO对应的t_id的取值范围为10～19。图9中，RAR1-1为终端设备1在第一组RO上发送preamble所对应的RAR；RAR1-2为终端设备1在第二组RO上发送preamble所对应的RAR。同理，RAR2-1为终端设备2在第一组RO上发送preamble所对应的RAR；RAR2-2为终端设备2在第二组RO上发送preamble所对应的RAR。
例如，假设终端设备1在BWP1上的第一组RO中的RO-1发送preamble，终端设备2在BWP2上的第一组RO中的RO-1发送preamble。由于BWP1上的RO-1和BWP2上的RO-1的时域资源相同。按照现有技术中RAR窗的设计，终端设备1和终端设备2的RAR窗的起始位置相同。另外，由于BWP1上的RO-1和BWP2上的RO-1的频域资源的索引也相同，按照现有技术中RA-RNTI的设计，终端设备1和终端设备2的RA-RNTI相同。可见，按照现有技术中RAR窗和RA-RNTI的设计，终端设备1和终端设备2的RAR窗的起始位置相同，终端设备1和终端设备2的RA-RNTI也相同，无法区分终端设备1和终端设备2。然而，按照本申请实施例中重新设计RAR窗的起始位置的方案，可使得终端设备1和终端设备2对应的RAR窗的起始位置不同，进而使得RAR窗的时域范围不同。例如，终端设备1的第一组RO对应的RAR窗的时域范围为时隙10～19。终端设备2的第一组RO对应的RAR窗的时域范围为20～29。终端设备1的第二组RO对应的RAR窗的时域范围为时隙20～29。这样，虽然终端设备1和终端设备2的RA-RNTI相同，但BWP1上的RO-1对应的RAR窗(即RAR1-1)的起始位置与BWP2上的RO-1对应的RAR窗(即RAR2-1)的起始位置不同，可以避免随机接入资源冲突，从而提高通信效率。也可以理解为，按照本申请实施例中重新设计RAR窗的起始位置的方案，可使得相同RAR窗内，不同终端设备对应的RA-RNTI取值范围不同，通过RA-RNTI的取值范围也可以区分不同的终端设备。例如，假设终端设备1在BWP1上的第一组RO中的RO-1发送preamble，终端设备2在BWP2上的第一组RO中的RO-1发送preamble。按照现有技术中RAR窗和RA-RNTI的设计，无法区分终端设备1和终端设备2。但是按照本申请实施例提供的方案，可对终端设备2的RAR窗进行偏移。例如，将终端设备2的RAR窗(即RAR1-1)移动至RAR2-1，即相当于终端设备1在BWP1上的第二组RO发送preamble所对应的RAR。从图9中可以看出，终端设备2在第一组RO发送preamble所对应的RAR窗为RAR2-1。即通过对终端设备1的RAR窗进行偏移，虽然使得终端设备1的RAR窗和终端设备2的RAR窗相同。但是RAR1-2对应的t_id的取值范围为10～19，RAR2-1对应的t_id的取值范围为0～9，从而使得终端设备1对应的RA-RNTI的取值范围与终端设备2对应的RA-RNTI的取值范围不同。即本申请实施例可使得在相同RAR窗内，不同终端设备对应的RA-RNTI取值范围不同，通过RA-RNTI的取值范围，以此也可区分不同的终端设备，从而避免随机接入资源冲突，从而提高通信效率。
各个终端设备发送preamble后，可根据PRACH的最后一个符号之后的1个符号后的第一个CORESET的第一个符号以及第二信息确定RAR窗的起始位置。网络设备和各个终端设备可根据预设规则确定第二信息，或者，网络设备也可以通过信令指示各个终端设备的第二信息。
示例性的，网络设备向终端设备发送包括第一信息的系统信息或配置信息。系统信息 可为系统消息块(system information block，SIB)1。配置信息可包括随机接入信道配置信息或BWP配置信息。换句话说，网络设备可复用随机接入信道配置信息或BWP配置信息来指示第二信息。
需要说的是，在本申请实施例中，方案二可以和方案一结合。例如，网络设备向各个终端设备发送第一信息以及第二信息。第一信息和第二信息可以承载于同一条信令，例如，第一信息和第二信息都携带在SIB1内。第一信息和第二信息也可以承载于不同的信令。例如，第一信息携带在BWP配置信息内，第二信息携带在随机接入信道配置信息内。以第一信息和第二信息都携带在SIB1内为例。假设第一信息包括a，第二信息用于指示RAR窗的偏移。假设存在终端设备1、终端设备2、终端设备3、终端设备4。网络设备向各个终端设备发送SIB1，该SIB1包括第一信息和第二信息。对终端设备1来说，a＝0，RAR窗的偏移为1个时隙。对终端设备2来说，a＝2，RAR窗的偏移为1个时隙。对终端设备3来说，a＝0，RAR窗的偏移为10个时隙。对终端设备4来说，a＝2，RAR窗的偏移为10个时隙。尽管终端设备1和终端设备2对应的RAR窗的偏移相同，但是终端设备1和终端设备2对应的a不同，因此，按照方案一中RA-RNTI的设计，能够区分终端设备1和终端设备2。对于终端设备2和终端设备4来说，虽然终端设备2和终端设备4对应的a相同，但是终端设备2和终端设备4对应的RAR窗的偏移不同。按照方案二中RAR窗的起始位置的设计，也能够区分终端设备2和终端设备4，从而避免随机接入冲突，即避免随机接入失败。
下面介绍本申请实施例提供的方案三。方案三中，网络设备配置用于发送preamble的时频资源信息，以增加RNTI更多可用的取值，从而用来区分更多类型或更多组的终端设备。
网络设备会为终端设备配置用于发送preamble的时频资源，以及一些相关参数。例如，网络设备可配置PRACH配置索引(configuration index)，不同的PRACH configuration index对应的发送preamble的时频资源有所不同。请参见表1，为用于发送preamble的时频资源的配置表。需要说明的是，表1仅列出了部分发送preamble的时频资源的配置，作为示意。
表1
Figure PCTCN2022101293-appb-000001
从表1可以看出，通过PRACH configuration index，网络设备可配置随机接入前导格 式(preamble format)、发送preamble的子帧号(subframe number)、发送preamble的起始符号(starting symbol)、子帧中PRACH时隙个数(number of PRACH slots with in a subframe)，PRACH时隙内的时域PRACH次数N t RA,slot(number of time-domain PRACH occassions within a PRACH slot)，以及PRACH周期N dur RA(PRACH duration)等。
RA-RNTI的空闲值可认为是没有使用的RA-RNTI。如前述公式(1-1)计算RA-RNTI以一个无线帧包括80个时隙为例，如果SCS为15kHz，一个无线帧包括10个时隙。如果10个时隙都被分配，那么有70个RA-RNTI的空闲值。如果10个时隙中仅分配5个时隙用于发送preamble，则这10个时隙中还有5个RA-RNTI的空闲值，那么这5个RA-RNTI的空闲值也可用来区分终端设备。因此，本申请实施例可配置用于发送preamble的时频资源信息，使得RA-RNTI的空闲值更多，从而利用空闲值来区分终端设备。
在本申请实施例中，网络设备可配置如下发送preamble的一种或多种时频资源信息。
1)、网络设备配置preamble的时域资源的长度。例如，网络设备配置preamble的时域资源的长度大于或等于N dur，所述N dur为大于2的整数。其中，preamble的时域资源的长度的单位可以是符号或者时隙。例如，网络设备可配置preamble的时域资源的长度大于或等于2个符号，或者大于或等于2个时隙。
在一种可能的实现中，预定义用于发送preamble的时域资源的长度最小值为N dur，所述N dur为大于2的整数；或者，预定义用于发送preamble的时域资源的长度的候选集合，所述候选集合中任一元素的取值大于N dur，所述N dur为大于2的整数，网络设备根据所述候选集合确定用于发送preamble的时域资源的长度。
应理解，用于计算RA-RNTI的s_id是发送preamble的时域资源所占用的符号中的第一个符号。那么发送preamble的时域资源所占用的符号中除第一个符号之外的剩余符号没有被用于计算RA-RNTI。本申请实施例可利用剩余符号来计算其他终端设备的RA-RNTI。可见，通过配置preamble的时域资源的最小长度可以增加RA-RNTI的空闲值，也就是说，配置更长的时域资源用于发送preamble，可以用于分配给不同的终端设备，避免随机接入资源冲突。
例如，网络设备根据preamble的时域资源的长度向终端设备发送第一信息。以第一信息是a为例。preamble的时域资源的长度大于或等于N，a的最大值为N，即a的取值范围是[0，N-1]，可以用于区分N组或N类终端设备。例如，存在第一类终端设备和第二类终端设备，第一类终端设备和第二类终端设备计算RA-RNTI的s_id、t_id、f_id以及ul_carrier_id相同。网络设备可向第一类终端设备发送第一信息，该第一信息包括a1；网络设备向第二类终端设备发送第一信息，该第一信息包括a2。a1和a2为[0，N-1]中的两个取值。对于第一类终端设备来说，接收来自网络设备的第一信息，根据a1以及s_id、t_id、f_id和ul_carrier_id可确定RA-RNTI 1。同理，第二类终端设备接收来自网络设备的第一信息，根据a2以及s_id、t_id、f_id和ul_carrier_id可确定RA-RNTI 2。由于a1和a2不同，所以RA-RNTI 1和RA-RNTI 2不同，从而可以区分第一类终端设备和第二类终端设备。即第一类终端设备根据RA-RNTI 1可接收RA-RNTI 1标识的RAR，第二类终端设备根据RA-RNTI 2接收RA-RNTI 2标识的RAR。
举例来说，请参见图10，假设preamble的时域资源的长度等于2个符号。如果网络设备配置发送preamble的起始符号为符号0，那么终端设备1占用符号0和符号1发送preamble。终端设备1计算RA-RNTI时，s_id为0。但是符号1没有被用于计算RA-RNTI。因此，符号1可用于终端设备2计算RA-RNTI。即preamble的时域资源的长度等于2个 符号，可区分两组或两类终端设备。类似的，如果preamble的时域资源的长度等于4个符号，那么可用于区分4组或4类终端设备。
需要说明的是，现有协议中定义当preamble的时域资源的占用的符号个数为2时，PRACH配置索引的取值范围为87～116,177～197,219～235,67～86、133～144、169～188、211～255、0～28、89～111、144～172、202～219。当配置preamble的时域资源的符号个数大于2。例如，preamble的时域资源的符号个数等于4时，网络设备不配置PRACH配置索引为上述多个取值范围中的任意取值。也可以认为终端设备不期望网络设备配置PRACH配置索引为上述多个取值范围中的任意取值。
当preamble的时域资源的长度大于或等于N dur的情况下，还可以按照方案一的方法区分不同终端设备。即不同的第一信息对应不同类型的终端设备或不同的特性。例如，N dur RA配置为4，第一信息包括a。终端设备1对应的a＝0，终端设备2对应的a＝2。
2)、网络设备配置一个无线帧包括的可用于发送preamble的子帧数。例如，网络设备配置一个无线帧包括的可用于发送preamble的子帧数小于或等于P，P为小于10的整数。
在一种可能的实现中，预定义用于发送preamble的子帧数最大值为P，P为小于10的整数；或者，预定义用于发送preamble的子帧数的候选集合，所述候选集合中任一元素的取值大于P，P为小于10的整数，网络设备根据所述候选集合确定用于发送preamble的子帧数。
应理解，一个无线帧包括10个子帧，这10个子帧中的P个子帧用于发送PRACH，那么剩余的10-P个子帧未被用于发送PRACH。可认为10-P个子帧未用来计算RA-RNTI。实际上，10-P个子帧可以用来计算RA-RNTI。因此，P越小，未被用来计算RA-RNTI的子帧数越多，那么使用一个无线帧计算出的RA-RNTI的空闲值也越多。例如，表1中，当PRACH configuration index为105时，subframe number为0,2,4,6,8，即用于发送PRACH的子帧数为5。剩余5个子帧未被用于计算RA-RNTI，可利用剩余5个子帧计算的RA-RNTI来区分更多的终端设备。网络设备可配置一个无线帧包括的可用于发送preamble的子帧数小于P，以增加RA-RNTI的空闲值，从而用来区分更多不同的终端设备。
3)、网络设备配置一个子帧包括的可用于发送preamble的时隙数。例如，网络设备配置一个子帧包括的可用于发送preamble的时隙数小于或等于N，N为小于2 μ的整数，μ为子载波间隔SCS参数。
在一种可能的实现中，预定义一个子帧包括的可用于发送preamble的时隙数最大值为N，N为小于2 μ的整数，μ为子载波间隔SCS参数；或者，预定义一个子帧包括的可用于发送preamble的时隙数的候选集合，所述候选集合中任一元素的取值为小于2 μ的整数，μ为子载波间隔SCS参数，网络设备根据所述候选集合确定一个子帧包括的可用于发送preamble的时隙数。
通过配置一个子帧包括的可用于发送preamble的时隙数小于或等于N可以使得一个无线帧计算出的RA-RNTI预留更多的空闲值，以用来区分更多不同的终端设备。当μ＝0，SCS＝15kHz，一个子帧中包括1个时隙；当μ＝1，SCS等于30kHz，1个子帧包括2个时隙；当μ＝2，SCS等于60kHz时，1个子帧包括4个时隙；当μ＝3，SCS等于120kHz，1个子帧包括8个时隙。例如，表1中PRACH配置索引为98，子帧中PRACH时隙个数为1，即一个子帧中用于传输PRACH的时隙数为1。当SCS＝30kHz时，一个子帧包括2个时隙。此时，有1个时隙未被用于发送PRACH，这1个时隙计算的RA-RNTI可认为是 RA-RNTI的空闲值。当SCS＝60kHz时，一个子帧包括4个时隙。此时，有3个时隙未被用于发送PRACH，这3个时隙计算的RA-RNTI可认为是RA-RNTI的空闲值。又例如，表1中PRACH配置索引为102，子帧中PRACH时隙个数为2，即一个子帧中用于传输PRACH的时隙数为2。当SCS＝60kHz时，一个子帧包括4个时隙。此时，有2个时隙未被用于发送PRACH，这2个时隙计算的RA-RNTI可认为是RA-RNTI的空闲值。
配置一个子帧包括的可用于发送preamble的时隙数小于或等于N的情况下，还可以按照方案一的方法区分不同的终端设备。即不同的第一信息对应不同类型的终端设备或不同的特性，从而使得RA-RNTI产生偏移来区分终端设备。
4)、网络设备配置一个无线帧包括的可用于发送preamble的时隙数。
在一种可能的实现中，预定义一个无线帧包括的可用于发送preamble的时隙数最大值；或者，预定义一个无线帧包括的可用于发送preamble的时隙数的候选集合，网络设备根据所述候选集合确定一个无线帧包括的可用于发送preamble的时隙数。
通过配置一个无线帧包括的可用于发送preamble的时隙数可以使得一个无线帧计算出的RA-RNTI预留更多的空闲值，以用来区分更多不同的终端设备。例如，表1中PRACH配置索引为98，subframe number为4，一个无线帧中用于传输RACH的子帧数为1；子帧中PRACH时隙个数为1，即一个子帧中用于传输PRACH的时隙数为1，一个无线帧中用于传输PRACH的时隙数为1。当SCS＝15kHz时，一个无线帧包括80个时隙，有79个时隙未被用于发送PRACH。网络设备配置一个无线帧包括的可用于发送preamble的时隙数小于80。同理，SCS等于60kHz，网络设备配置一个无线帧包括的可用于发送preamble的时隙数小于40。SCS等于30kHz，网络设备配置一个无线帧包括的可用于发送preamble的时隙数小于20。SCS等于15kHz，网络设备配置一个无线帧包括的可用于发送preamble的时隙数小于10。
配置一个无线帧包括的可用于发送preamble的时隙数小于或等于某个取值的情况下，还可以按照方案一的方法区分不同的终端设备。即不同的第一信息对应不同类型的终端设备或不同的特性，从而使得RA-RNTI产生偏移来区分终端设备。如SCS＝15kHz时，至多可以区分相同配置下的80个关联不同特征参量的终端设备。又如，SCS＝30kHz时，一个帧包括40个时隙。此时，这40个时隙中有39个时隙未被用于发送PRACH。这种情况下，可为使用方案一的方法区分不同用户。即不同的第一信息对应不同类型的终端设备或不同的特性，从而使得RA-RNTI产生偏移来区分终端设备。如本例中至多可以区分相同配置下的40个关联不同特征参量的终端设备。
需要说的是，在本申请实施例中，方案三可以和方案一结合。方案三的配置可用于区分不同类型或不同特征或不同组的终端设备。结合方案一，可区分属于同一种类型(组)的不同终端设备。其中，方案三中的1)-4)中的任意一种，可以和方案一中2)-6)中的任意一种结合。例如，采用方案三中的1)，假设，网络设备配置preamble的时域资源的长度等于4，不同的终端设备可通过公式(3)-公式(6)中的任意公式来区分。
例如，网络设备可向终端设备发送随机接入信道配置信息以及第一信息。随机接入信道配置信息和第一信息可以承载于相同的信令中，也可以承载于不同的信令中。随机接入信道配置信息可配置用于发送preamble的如上1)-4)中的一种或多种时域资源。不同的终端设备发送preamble的时域资源可以相同，也可以不同。当不同的终端设备发送preamble的时域资源相同时，不同终端设备对应的第一信息不同，以区分不同的终端设备，减少或 避免随机接入冲突，降低随机接入的失败率。
举例来说，请参见图10，为三个终端设备采用的a的示意图。图10中，三个终端设备为终端设备1、终端设备2和终端设备3。终端设备1的preamble的时域资源的长度为2，终端设备2的preamble的时域资源的长度为4，终端设备3的preamble的时域资源的长度为4。终端设备1对应的a为0，终端设备2对应的a为1，终端设备3对应的a为3。终端设备1与终端设备2(或终端设备3)的preamble的时域资源的长度不同，所以可区分终端设备1终端设备2(或终端设备3)。尽管终端设备2和终端设备3的preamble的时域资源的长度相同，但是终端设备2和终端设备3对应的a的取值不同，所以可区分终端设备2和终端设备3。
另外，方案三可以和方案二结合。方案三的配置可用于区分不同类型或不同特征或不同组的终端设备。结合方案二，可区分属于同一种类型(组)的不同终端设备。其中，方案三中的1)-4)中的任意一种，都可以和方案二结合。
例如，网络设备可向终端设备发送随机接入信道配置信息以及第二信息。随机接入信道配置信息和第二信息可以承载于相同的信令中，也可以承载于不同的信令中。随机接入信道配置信息可配置用于发送preamble的如上1)-4)中的一种或多种时域资源。不同的终端设备发送preamble的时域资源可以相同，也可以不同。当不同的终端设备发送preamble的时域资源相同时，不同终端设备对应的第二信息不同，以能够区分不同的终端设备。
举例来说，假设存在终端设备1、终端设备2、终端设备3、终端设备4。以随机接入信道配置信息包括第二信息为例。网络设备可向这4个终端设备分别发送随机接入信道配置信息。终端设备1的随机接入信道配置信息可指示一个无线帧中包括1个子帧，子帧号为1，RAR窗的偏移为1个时隙。终端设备2的随机接入信道配置信息可指示一个无线帧中包括1个子帧，子帧号为7，RAR窗的偏移为1个时隙。终端设备3的随机接入信道配置信息可指示一个无线帧中包括1个子帧，子帧号为1，RAR窗的偏移为2个时隙。终端设备4的随机接入信道配置信息指示一个无线帧中包括1个子帧，子帧号为7，RAR窗的偏移为2个时隙。尽管终端设备1和终端设备2的随机接入信道配置信息指示的一个无线帧包括的子帧数相同，以及RAR窗的偏移相同，但是终端设备1与终端设备2的子帧号不同，所以通过子帧号可区分终端设备1终端设备2。同理，通过RAR窗的偏移可区分终端设备1终端设备3。
需要说明的是，在一些实施例中，方案一、方案二和方案三也可以结合，从而用来区分更多类型或更多组的终端设备。例如，方案三的配置可用于区分不同类型或不同特征或不同组的终端设备。结合方案二可进一步区分属于同一种类型(组)的不同特征参量的终端设备。进一步地，结合方案一，可进一步区分不同的终端设备。与前述方案三与方案一或方案二结合类似，这里不再赘述。
通常为了在同一时间段内能够区分更多不同的终端设备，为终端设备配置的用于发送preamble的时域资源会更稀疏，以增加更多RA-RNTI的空闲值。例如，网络设备配置的一个无线帧包括的可用于发送preamble的子帧数较小。或者，网络设备配置的一个无线帧包括的可用于发送preamble的时隙数较小。或者，网络设备配置的一个子帧包括的可用于发送preamble的时隙数较小。这样虽然RA-RNTI的空闲值更多，但是用于发送preamble的时域资源较为稀疏，使得同一时间段内的PO更少，会增加随机接入的时延。即导致RA-RNTI超出最大允许范围。举例来说，有10个终端设备，每个终端设备发送preamble 的时域资源的长度为4个符号。如果这10个终端设备中的某个终端设备随机接入失败，那么该终端设备至少需要等待10×4个符号之后，才能再次进行随机接入。
为此，本申请实施例提供方案四，方案四通过配置在相同RNTI对应的RO发送随机接入前导的终端设备的类型个数，来降低随机接入时延。
具体的，可以预定义在相同RNTI对应的RO发送随机接入前导的终端设备的类型个数最大值为N，所述N为正整数。
作为一种示例，网络设备可配置在相同RNTI对应的RO发送随机接入前导的终端设备类型数量小于或等于Q。在区分不同类型的终端设备的同时，尽量降低随机接入时延。沿用上述的例子，假设每类终端设备发送preamble的时域资源的长度为4个符号。网络设备配置在相同RNTI对应的RO发送随机接入前导的终端设备类型为4。如果这4类个终端设备中的某类终端设备随机接入失败，那么该类终端设备再次进行随机接入，可在4×4个符号之后，相比在10×4个符号之后来说，降低了随机接入时延。
作为可替换的方案，网络设备也可以配置在相同RNTI对应的RO发送随机接入前导的不同类型的终端设备的组合个数。不同类型的终端设备，可通过该终端设备的特征参量来表征。例如，不同类型的终端设备的组合，有{低复杂度UE，非低复杂度UE}，{4步RACH，2步RACH}，{SDT，非SDT}，{CE，非CE},{1天线，2天线}，{RAN slicing，非RAN slicing}等。在本申请实施例中，协议预定义或者网络设备可配置不同类型的终端设备的组合个数小于或等于S。S可为大于1的整数，例如S等于2。举例来说，不同类型的终端设备的组合个数是2。例如，不同类型的终端设备的组合包括{CE，非CE},{1天线，2天线}，相当于有4类终端设备。即第一类终端设备的特征参量包括CE和1天线，第二类终端设备的特征参量包括CE和2天线，第三类终端设备的特征参量包括非CE和1天线，第四类终端设备的特征参量包括非CE和2天线。相当于网络设备配置在相同RNTI对应的RO发送随机接入前导的终端设备类型等于4。
本申请实施例通过配置在相同RNTI对应的RO发送随机接入前导的终端设备的类型个数，在区分不同类型的终端设备的同时，可尽量降低随机接入的时延。需要说明的是，方案四也可以和方案一、方案二或方案三结合。例如，方案四和方案一结合，可限定与第一信息相关联的特征参量的种类个数的最大值可以为2，以避免根据第一信息所确定的RA-RNTI超出RA-RNTI最大允许范围。与第一信息相关联的特征参量的种类个数可以是协议定义的，也可以是网络设备配置的。
下面介绍本申请实施例提供的方案五，即利用MAC PDU中扩展域或回退指示域的位置来区分不同类型的终端设备。
在介绍方案五之前，首先介绍与方案五相关的技术特征。
请参见图11，为随机接入过程的一种示意图。终端设备在RO上向网络设备发送preamble。网络设备向终端设备发送的RAR可包括PDCCH和PDSCH，PDCCH用于调度PDSCH。PDCCH中携带DCI。PDSCH包括用于承载RAR的MAC PDU。MAC PDU可包括一个或多个sub PDU(又称MAC sub PDU)，以及填充(padding)字段。图11以MAC PDU包括n个sub PDU为例。
MAC PDU包括的各个sub PDU包括子头(subheader)。subheader包括E字段、回退指示(backoff indication，BI)字段、Type字段(简称T字段)、预留(reserved，R)字段以及随机接入前导(random access preamble，RAP)标识(identifier，ID)字段和MAC  RAR中的一种或多种。E字段用于指示本sub PDU后面是否还有sub PDU。应理解，最后一个sub PDU中的E字段的值为“0”，表示该sub PDU之后没有sub PDU。现有协议中，MAC PDU最后一个sub PDU中E字段的值为0，除最后一个sub PDU之外的其余sub PDU中E字段的值为1。即现有协议中，MAC PDU中只有一个sub PDU中E字段的值为0。
BI字段用于指示标识小区中的过载条件。T字段是指示MAC子头是否包含RAP ID或退避指示符的标志。T字段为“0”用于指示对应subheader包括BI字段，所述BI字段用于指示小区的过载条件。如果有BI，那么第一个subPDU包括的T字段肯定为“0”。T字段为“1”用于指示subheader包括RAP ID，或者指示subheader包括RAP ID和MAC RAR。Subheader包括RAP ID可指示确认的广播信息请求(SI request)。RAP ID的内容和终端设备发起随机接入时的preamble index相对应。如果preamble index对应的RAR用于响应广播信息请求，那么RAP ID后面没有MAC RAR。如果preamble index对应的RAR用于响应随机接入请求，那么RAP ID后面有MAC RAR。
总的来说，sub PDU的结构可包括三种类型。为了便于理解，请参见图12，为MAC PDU的一种结构示意图。图12以MAC PDU包括的sub PDU1、sub PDU2、sub PDU3分别对应一种类型为例。即sub PDU1包括E字段、T字段、R字段以及BI字段。sub PDU2包括E字段、T字段以及RAP ID字段。sub PDU3包括E字段、T字段以及RAP ID字段和MAC RAR。
现有协议中，MAC PDU最后一个sub PDU中E字段的值为0，除最后一个sub PDU之外的其余sub PDU中E字段的值为1。在本申请实施例中，可以使得MAC PDU包括的多个subPDU中至少一个subPDU包括为“0”的E字段，从而通过至少个subPDU中为“0”的E字段来标识不同的终端设备。也就是复用sub PDU中的E字段来区分不同终端设备。例如，可定义相邻两个为“0”的E字段之间的subPDU包括一个终端设备的RAR，不同终端设备的RAR所在的subPDU位于两个E字段为“0”的subPDU。
同理，根据现有协议，仅承载BI的subPDU中的T字段为“0”，其余subPDU中T字段为“1”，且T字段为“0”的subPDU为第一个subPDU。在另一些实施例中，也可通过T字段为“0”的非第一个subPDU来区分不同的终端设备。例如，可以在两类终端设备之间插入T字段为“0”的subPDU，作为不同终端设备的标识。也就是相邻两个为“0”的T字段之间的subPDU包括一个终端设备对应的RAR，不同终端设备所对应的RAR所在的subPDU位于两个T字段为“0”的subPDU。
请参见图13，为本申请实施例提供的一种随机接入方法的流程示意图。在下文的介绍过程中，以该方法应用于图5所示的通信系统为例。另外，该方法可由两个通信装置执行，这两个通信装置例如为第一通信装置和第二通信装置。为了便于介绍，在下文中，以该方法由网络设备和终端设备执行为例，也就是，以第一通信装置是终端设备，第二通信装置是网络设备为例。图13所示的随机接入方法为4步随机接入方法，即图13所示实施例所涉及的RNTI为RA-RNTI。需要说明的是，图13以4步随机接入方法为例，但是也适用于2步随机接入过程。图13所示的随机接入方法的流程描述如下。
S1301、终端设备向网络设备发送preamble。
应理解，S1301与前述的S501相同，这里不再赘述。
S1302、网络设备向终端设备发送下行信道，相应的，终端设备接收该下行信道。该下行信道包括承载RAR的MAC PDU。
网络设备接收到来自终端设备的preamble之后，可确定与该终端设备对应的RA-RNTI，并基于该RA-RNTI对针对preamble的RAR进行加扰。网络设备对RAR加扰之后，可向终端设备发送加扰后的RAR。例如，网络设备向终端设备发送下行信道，该下行信道包括承载RAR的MAC PDU的PDSCH。
MAC PDU包括多个subPDU，网络设备可配置该终端设备的RAR承载于MAC PDU包括的多个subPDU中与M关联的K个subPDU。也就是，K个subPDU可承载在相同RO中发送preamble的RAR。即一个RO对应的RAR有K个或(K-1)个。K为正整数。M为正整数，M可认为是用于确定终端设备检测RAR的subPDU的范围的参数。检测也可以理解为读取、检索或搜索等。对于终端设备而言，终端设备获取RAR之前，可确定M，从而在与M关联的K个subPDU中获取自己的RAR。
在一些实施例中，每个RO对应的至少一个RAR中的最后一个RAR的E字段的取值为0。例如，K个subPDU的前(K-1)个subPDU中的每个subPDU内的E字段的取值都为1。且，K个subPDU的第一个subPDU的前一个subPDU的E字段的取值为0，K个subPDU的第K个subPDU的E字段的取值为0。也就是，一个终端设备的RAR位于相邻两个为“0”的E字段之间的subPDU。例如，假设终端设备的RAR所在的subPDU称为第一subPDU。第一subPDU可位于第二subPDU和第三subPDU之间。第二subPDU可为第(M-1)个E字段为“0”的subPDU，第三subPDU可为第M个E字段为“0”的subPDU，M为大于或等于2的整数。或者，第二subPDU为第M个第一字段为“0”的subPDU，第三subPDU可为第(M+1)个第一字段为“0”的subPDU，M为大于或等于1的整数。不同的终端设备对应的M不同，从而可复用sub PDU中的E字段来区分不同终端设备。
需要说明的是，K个subPDU的前(K-1)subPDU为按照顺序在前的(K-1)个subPDU。例如，K个subPDU中的第一个subPDU的索引为0，那么前(K-1)subPDU是索引为0到(K-2)的(K-1)个subPDU。第一subPDU也可以是第二subPDU或第三subPDU。也就是，第一subPDU的范围从第二subPDU开始，到第三subPDU为止。或者，第一subPDU的范围从第二subPDU之后的第一个subPDU开始，到第三subPDU为止。或者，第一subPDU的范围从第二subPDU开始，到第三subPDU之前的一个subPDU为止。
举例来说，请参见图14，为本申请实施例提供的MAC PDU的一种结构示意图。图14以MAC PDU包括的n个sub PDU。图14以n个subPDU中包括3个E字段为“0”的
subPDU为例，这3个E字段为“0”的subPDU依次为subPDU3，subPDUm和subPDUn。假设有3个终端设备，这3个终端设备分别为终端设备1、终端设备2和终端设备3。终端设备1解析所接收的MAC PDU，终端设备1获取到第一个E字段为“0”的subPDU，
即subPDU3，认为MAC PDU结束。终端设备1在subPDU3之前获取RAR。终端设备2解析所接收的MAC PDU，终端设备2获取到第二个E字段为“0”的subPDU，即
subPDUm，认为MAC PDU结束。终端设备2在subPDUm之前获取RAR。终端设备3解析所接收的MAC PDU，终端设备3获取到第三个E字段为“0”的subPDU，即subPDUn，认为MAC PDU结束。终端设备3在subPDUn之前获取RAR。
在另一些实施例中，每个RO对应的至少一个RAR中的最后一个RAR的T字段的取值为0。例如，K个subPDU的前(K-1)个subPDU中的每个subPDU内的T字段的取值都为1。且，K个subPDU的第一个subPDU的前一个subPDU的T字段的取值为0，K个subPDU的第K个subPDU的T字段的取值为0。
举例来说，请参见图15A，为本申请实施例提供的MAC PDU的一种结构示意图。图15A以MAC PDU包括的8个sub PDU。图15A以8个subPDU中除第一个subPDU之外，T字段为“0”的subPDU为subPDU5和subPDU7。假设有3个终端设备，这3个终端设备分别为终端设备1、终端设备2和终端设备3。终端设备1解析所接收的MAC PDU，终端设备1获取到第一个T字段为“0”的subPDU，即subPDU5，终端设备1在subPDU3之前获取RAR。终端设备2解析所接收的MAC PDU，终端设备2获取到第二个T字段为“0”的subPDU，即subPDU7，终端设备2在subPDU7之前获取RAR。终端设备3解析所接收的MAC PDU，终端设备3在subPDU7之后的subPDU获取RAR。
图15A以K个subPDU中的第K个subPDU包括subheader和MAC RAR为例。作为一种可替换的方案，K个subPDU中的第K个subPDU也可只包括subheader，作为不同终端设备的标识。例如，请参见图15B，与图15A的不同之处在于，图15B中，subPDU5可包括subheader，subPDU7可也只包括subheader。
S1303、终端设备确定M。
终端设备获取RAR之前，可确定M，从而在与M关联的K个subPDU中获取自己的RAR。在本申请实施例中，M可以是网络设备指示的。例如，网络设备可发送指示信息，该指示信息用于指示一个或多个M。终端设备可根据该指示信息确定属于自己的M，进而根据M获取RAR。该指示信息可以是系统信息、下行控制信息和调度RAR的下行控制信息中的至少一种。例如，网络设备向终端设备发送第一指示信息。该第一指示信息可用于指示M，例如第一指示信息包括M。
需要说明的是，S1303可在S1302之前执行，也可在S1302之后执行。
S1304、终端设备在与M关联的K个subPDU中获取针对preamble的RAR。
终端设备的RAR所在的subPDU，即第一subPDU位于第二subPDU和第三subPDU之间。以第二subPDU为第(M-1)个E字段为“0”的subPDU，第三subPDU为第M个E字段为“0”的subPDU为例。终端设备确定M之后，可在与M关联的K个subPDU中的第(M-1)个E字段为“0”的subPDU，以及第M个E字段为“0”的subPDU之间获取RAR。例如，第一指示信息可指示M＝3。即第二subPDU可为第2个E字段为“0”的subPDU，第三subPDU可为第3个E字段为“0”的subPDU。终端设备在第2个E字段为“0”的subPDU和第3个E字段为“0”的subPDU之间检测RAR。
需要说明的是，方案五可以与前述方案一、方案二或方案三或方案四结合。例如，方案五与方案一结合。方案五可用于区分不同类型(特性或组)的终端设备，结合方案一可以区分同一类型的终端设备中不同的终端设备。又例如，方案五与方案二结合，方案五可用于区分不同类型(特性或组)的终端设备，结合方案二可以区分同一类型的终端设备中不同的终端设备。方案五与方案三结合，方案五可用于区分不同类型(特性或组)的终端设备，结合方案三可以区分同一类型的终端设备中不同的终端设备。又例如，方案五与方案四结合，方案五可用于区分不同类型(特性或组)的终端设备，结合方案四可降低各个类型终端设备的随机接入时延。
上述本申请提供的实施例中，分别从终端设备和网络设备之间交互的角度对本申请实施例提供的方法进行了介绍。其中，网络设备执行的步骤也可以由不同的通信装置来分别实现。例如：第一装置用于根据第一信息确定RNTI，第二装置用于根据RNTI对RAR进行加扰，也就是说第一装置和第二装置共同完成本申请实施例中网络设备执行的步骤，本 申请不限定具体的划分方式。当网络架构中包括一个或多个分布单元(distributed unit，DU)、一个或多个集中单元(centralized unit，CU)和一个或多个射频单元(RU)时，上述网络设备执行的步骤可以分别由DU、CU和RU来实现。为了实现上述本申请实施例提供的方法中的各功能，终端设备和网络设备可以包括硬件结构和/或软件模块，以硬件结构、软件模块、或硬件结构加软件模块的形式来实现上述各功能。上述各功能中的某个功能以硬件结构、软件模块、还是硬件结构加软件模块的方式来执行，取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。
基于与方法实施例的同一发明构思，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置。下面结合附图介绍本申请实施例中用来实现上述方法的通信装置。
图16为本申请实施例提供的通信装置1600的示意性框图。该通信装置1600可以包括处理模块1610和收发模块1620。可选的，还可以包括存储单元，该存储单元可以用于存储指令(代码或者程序)和/或数据。处理模块1610和收发模块1620可以与该存储单元耦合，例如，处理模块1610可以读取存储单元中的指令(代码或者程序)和/或数据，以实现相应的方法。上述各个单元可以独立设置，也可以部分或者全部集成。
一些可能的实施方式中，通信装置1600能够对应实现上述方法实施例中终端设备的行为和功能，例如实现图5或图8或图13的实施例中终端设备执行的方法。例如通信装置1600可以为终端设备，也可以为应用于终端设备中的部件(例如芯片或者电路)，也可以是终端设备中的芯片或芯片组或芯片中用于执行相关方法功能的一部分。在一些实施例中，收发模块1620可以用于执行图5所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部接收或发送操作，例如图5所示的实施例中的S501，S503，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。其中，处理模块1610用于执行如图5所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作，例如图5所示的实施例中的S504，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。在另一些实施例中，收发模块1620可以用于执行图8所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部接收或发送操作，例如图8所示的实施例中的S801，S803，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。其中，处理模块1610用于执行如图8所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作，例如图8所示的实施例中的S804，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。在另一些实施例中，收发模块1620可以用于执行图13所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部接收或发送操作，例如图13所示的实施例中的S1301，S1302，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。其中，处理模块1610用于执行如图13所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作，例如图8所示的实施例中的S1303，S1304，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
作为一种示例，收发模块1620用于在第一RO发送随机接入前导。处理模块1610用于根据第一RO的第一个OFDM符号的索引s_id、第一RO的第一个时隙的索引t_id、第一RO在频域的索引f_id、发送随机接入前导所使用的上行载波的标识ul_carrier_id和第一信息确定第一RNTI。第一RNTI满足：第一RNTI＝1+s_id+a+14×(t_id+b)+14×80×(f_id+c)+14×80×8×(ul_carrier_id+d)。第一信息包括a、b、c以及d中的一种或多种。收发模块1620还用于根据第一RNTI接收下行信道。
作为一种可选的实现方式，第一信息与如下的至少一项特征参量相关联：终端设备的类型，终端设备的能力，终端设备的复杂度，终端设备的带宽，终端设备的天线数，消息 3的传输类型，数据的传输类型，切片能力指示，BWP ID以及BWP大小。
作为一种可选的实现方式，a的最大值或a的取值范围与以下至少一种参数相关：随机接入前导的长度、随机接入前导的时域资源的长度，以及第一RO所在的BWP的配置。
作为一种可选的实现方式，b的最大值或b的取值范围与以下至少一种参数相关：随机接入前导的子载波间隔，随机接入前导的长度，随机接入前导的时域资源的长度，一个无线帧包括的可用于发送随机接入前导的时隙数，一个子帧包括的可用于发送随机接入前导的时隙数。
作为一种可选的实现方式，满足如下至少一项：a与s_id之和小于14，b与t_id之和小于80，c与f_id之和小于8，或d与ul_carrier_id之和小于3。
作为一种可选的实现方式，满足如下的至少一项：随机接入前导的时域资源的长度大于或等于L，L为大于2的整数；一个无线帧包括的可用于发送随机接入前导的时隙数小于或等于80；一个子帧包括的可用于发送随机接入前导的时隙数小于或等于N，N为小于2 μ的整数，μ为SCS参数；一个无线帧包括的可用于发送随机接入前导的子帧数小于或等于P，P为小于10的整数。
作为一种可选的实现方式，不同的第一信息关联的特征参量集合不同，其中，所述特征参量集合包含一种或多种特征参量。
作为另一种示例，收发模块1620用于向网络设备发送随机接入前导，并接收来自网络设备的MAC PDU，该MAC PDU包括多个subPDU。处理模块1610用于确定M，并在与M关联的K个subPDU中获取针对随机接入前导的随机接入响应。M是正整数，K是正整数。K个subPDU的前(K-1)个subPDU中的每个subPDU内的第一字段取值都为1，且K个subPDU的第一个subPDU的前一个subPDU的第一字段的取值为0，K个subPDU的第K个subPDU的第一字段的取值为0。第一字段为T字段或E字段。
作为又一种示例，收发模块1620用于向网络设备发送随机接入前导。处理模块1610用于根据第二信息确定RAR窗的起始位置。收发模块1620还用于根据处理模块1610所确定的RAR窗的起始位置接收来自网络设备的RAR。其中，第二信息用于指示RAR窗的起始位置的偏移。
在可能的实现方式中，RAR窗的起始位置为PRACH的最后一个符号之后的M1个符号后的第一个CORESET的第一个符号。M1为正整数，所述第二信息用于指示M1。
在可能的实现方式中，RAR窗的起始位置为RPACH的最后一个符号之后的M2个符号后的第一个CORESET的第一个符号，其中，M2＝1+14×offset_s。所述第二信息用于指示M2。
在可能的实现方式中，RAR窗的起始位置为RPACH的最后一个符号后的1个符号后的第M3个CORESET的第一个符号，M3为大于1的整数。第二信息用于指示M3。
一些可能的实施方式中，通信装置1600能够对应实现上述方法实施例中网络设备的行为和功能，例如，实现图5或图8或图13的实施例中网络设备执行的方法。例如通信装置1600可以为网络设备，也可以为应用于网络设备中的部件(例如芯片或者电路)，也可以是网络设备中的芯片或芯片组或芯片中用于执行相关方法功能的一部分。在一些实施例中，收发模块1620可以用于执行图5所示的实施例中由网络设备所执行的全部接收或发送操作，例如图5所示的实施例中的S501，S503，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。其中，处理模块1610用于执行如图5所示的实施例中由网络设备所执行的除 了收发操作之外的全部操作，例如图5所示的实施例中的S502，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。在另一些实施例中，收发模块1620可以用于执行图8所示的实施例中由网络设备所执行的全部接收或发送操作，例如图8所示的实施例中的S801，S803，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。其中，处理模块1610用于执行如图8所示的实施例中由网络设备所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作，例如图8所示的实施例中的S802，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。在另一些实施例中，收发模块1620可以用于执行图13所示的实施例中由网络设备所执行的全部接收或发送操作，例如图8所示的实施例中的S1301，S1302，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。其中，处理模块1610用于执行如图8所示的实施例中由网络设备所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
在一些实施例中，收发模块1620用于在第一RO接收来自终端设备的随机接入前导。处理模块1610用于根据第一RO的第一个OFDM符号的索引s_id、第一RO的第一个时隙的索引t_id、第一RO在频域的索引f_id、发送随机接入前导所使用的上行载波的标识ul_carrier_id和第一信息确定第一RNTI。第一RNTI满足：第一RNTI＝1+s_id+a+14×(t_id+b)+14×80×(f_id+c)+14×80×8×(ul_carrier_id+d)。第一信息包括a、b、c以及d中的一种或多种。收发模块1620还用于根据第一RNTI发送下行信道。
作为一种可选的实现方式，第一信息与如下的至少一项特征参量相关联：终端设备的类型，终端设备的能力，终端设备的复杂度，终端设备的带宽，终端设备的天线数，消息3的传输类型，数据的传输类型，切片能力指示，BWP ID以及BWP大小。
作为一种可选的实现方式，a的最大值或a的取值范围与以下至少一种参数相关：随机接入前导的长度、随机接入前导的时域资源的长度，以及第一RO所在的BWP的配置。
作为一种可选的实现方式，b的最大值或b的取值范围与以下至少一种参数相关：随机接入前导的子载波间隔，随机接入前导的长度，随机接入前导的时域资源的长度，一个无线帧包括的可用于发送随机接入前导的时隙数，一个子帧包括的可用于发送随机接入前导的时隙数。
作为一种可选的实现方式，满足如下至少一项：a与s_id之和小于14，b与t_id之和小于80，c与f_id之和小于8，或d与ul_carrier_id之和小于3。
作为一种可选的实现方式，满足如下的至少一项：随机接入前导的时域资源的长度大于或等于L，L为大于2的整数；一个无线帧包括的可用于发送随机接入前导的时隙数小于或等于80；一个子帧包括的可用于发送随机接入前导的时隙数小于或等于N，N为小于2 μ的整数，μ为SCS参数；一个无线帧包括的可用于发送随机接入前导的子帧数小于或等于P，P为小于10的整数。
作为一种可选的实现方式，不同的第一信息关联的特征参量集合不同，其中，所述特征参量集合包含一种或多种特征参量。
在另一些实施例中，收发模块1620用于接收来自终端设备的随机接入前导。处理模块1610用于基于RNTI对RAR进行加扰。所述收发模块1620用于向终端设备发送MAC PDU。所述MAC PDU包括多个subPDU。多个subPDU中与M关联的K个subPDU承载针对随机接入前导的RAR。K个subPDU的前(K-1)个subPDU中的每个subPDU内的第一字段取值都为1，且K个subPDU的第一个subPDU的前一个subPDU的第一字段的取值为0，K个subPDU的第K个subPDU的第一字段的取值为0。第一字段为T字段或E字 段，M是正整数，K是正整数。
在另一些实施例中，收发模块1620用于接收来自终端设备的随机接入前导。处理模块1610用于确定RAR窗的起始位置。收发模块1620还用于根据处理模块1610所确定的RAR窗的起始位置向终端设备发送RAR。其中，第二信息用于指示RAR窗的起始位置的偏移。
在可能的实现方式中，RAR窗的起始位置为PRACH的最后一个符号之后的M1个符号后的第一个CORESET的第一个符号。M1为正整数，所述第二信息用于指示M1。例如，第二信号包括M1-1，或者第二信息包括M。
在可能的实现方式中，RAR窗的起始位置为RPACH的最后一个符号之后的M2个符号后的第一个CORESET的第一个符号，其中，M2＝1+14×offset_s。所述第二信息用于指示M2。例如，第二信息包括M2，或者，第二信息包括offset_s。
在可能的实现方式中，RAR窗的起始位置为RPACH的最后一个符号后的1个符号后的第M3个CORESET的第一个符号，M3为大于1的整数。第二信息用于指示M3。例如，第二信号包括M3-1，或者第二信息包括M3。
如图17所示为本申请实施例提供的通信装置1700，其中，通信装置1700可以是终端设备，能够实现本申请实施例提供的方法中终端设备的功能，或者，通信装置1700可以是网络设备，能够实现本申请实施例提供的方法中网络设备的功能；通信装置1700也可以是能够支持终端设备实现本申请实施例提供的方法中对应的功能的装置，或者能够支持网络设备实现本申请实施例提供的方法中对应的功能的装置。其中，该通信装置1700可以为芯片系统。本申请实施例中，芯片系统可以由芯片构成，也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。
在硬件实现上，上述收发模块1620可以为收发器，收发器集成在通信装置1700中构成通信接口1710。
通信装置1700包括至少一个处理器1720，用于实现或用于支持通信装置1700实现本申请实施例提供的方法中网络设备(基站)或终端设备的功能。具体参见方法示例中的详细描述，此处不做赘述。
通信装置1700还可以包括至少一个存储器1730，用于存储程序指令和/或数据。存储器1730和处理器1720耦合。本申请实施例中的耦合是装置、单元或模块之间的间接耦合或通信连接，可以是电性，机械或其它的形式，用于装置、单元或模块之间的信息交互。处理器1720可能和存储器1730协同操作。处理器1720可能执行存储器1730中存储的程序指令和/或数据，以使得通信装置1700实现相应的方法。所述至少一个存储器中的至少一个可以包括于处理器中。需要说明的是，存储器1730不是必须的，所以在图17中以虚线进行示意。
通信装置1700还可以包括通信接口1710，用于通过传输介质和其它设备进行通信，从而用于通信装置1700中的装置可以和其它设备进行通信。示例性地，当该通信装置为终端时，该其它设备为网络设备；或者，当该通信装置为网络设备时，该其它设备为终端。处理器1720可以利用通信接口1710收发数据。通信接口1710具体可以是收发器。
本申请实施例中不限定上述通信接口1710、处理器1720以及存储器1730之间的具体连接介质。本申请实施例在图17中以存储器1730、处理器1720以及通信接口1710之间通过总线1740连接，总线在图17中以粗线表示，其它部件之间的连接方式，仅是进行示 意性说明，并不引以为限。所述总线可以分为地址总线、数据总线、控制总线等。为便于表示，图17中仅用一条粗线表示，但并不表示仅有一根总线或一种类型的总线。
在本申请实施例中，处理器1720可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器、专用集成电路、现场可编程门阵列或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件，可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者任何常规的处理器等。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件处理器执行完成，或者用处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。
在本申请实施例中，存储器1730可以是非易失性存储器，比如硬盘(hard disk drive，HDD)或固态硬盘(solid-state drive，SSD)等，还可以是易失性存储器(volatile memory)，例如随机存取存储器(random-access memory，RAM)。存储器是能够用于携带或存储具有指令或数据结构形式的期望的程序代码并能够由计算机存取的任何其他介质，但不限于此。本申请实施例中的存储器还可以是电路或者其它任意能够实现存储功能的装置，用于存储程序指令和/或数据。
需要说明的是，上述实施例中的通信装置可以是终端设备也可以是电路，也可以是应用于终端设备中的芯片或者其他具有上述终端设备功能的组合器件、部件等。当通信装置是终端设备时，收发模块可以是收发器，可以包括天线和射频电路等，处理模块可以是处理器，例如：中央处理模块(central processing unit，CPU)。当通信装置是具有上述终端设备功能的部件时，收发模块可以是射频单元，处理模块可以是处理器。当通信装置是芯片系统时，该通信装置可以是现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array，FPGA)，可以是专用集成芯片(application specific integrated circuit，ASIC)，还可以是系统芯片(system on chip，SoC)，还可以是CPU，还可以是网络处理器(network processor，NP)，还可以是数字信号处理电路(digital signal processor，DSP)，还可以是微控制器(micro controller unit，MCU)，还可以是可编程控制器(programmable logic device，PLD)或其他集成芯片。处理模块可以是芯片系统的处理器。收发模块或通信接口可以是芯片系统的输入输出接口或接口电路。例如，接口电路可以为代码/数据读写接口电路。所述接口电路，可以用于接收代码指令(代码指令存储在存储器中，可以直接从存储器读取，或也可以经过其他器件从存储器读取)并传输至处理器；处理器可以用于运行所述代码指令以执行上述方法实施例中的方法。又例如，接口电路也可以为通信处理器与收发机之间的信号传输接口电路。
示例性的，上述实施例中的通信装置可为芯片，该芯片包括逻辑电路和输入输出接口，还可以包括存储器。其中，输入输出接口可以用于接收代码指令(代码指令存储在存储器中，可以直接从存储器读取，或也可以经过其他器件从存储器读取)并传输至所述逻辑电路；所述逻辑电路，可以用于运行所述代码指令以执行上述方法实施例中的方法。或者，输入输出接口也可以为逻辑电路与收发机之间的信号传输接口电路。
图18示出了一种简化的通信装置的结构示意图。便于理解和图示方便，图18中，以通信装置是基站作为例子。该基站可应用于如图4所示的系统中，可以为图4中的网络设备，执行上述方法实施例中网络设备的功能。
该通信装置1800可包括收发器1810、存储器1821以及处理器1822。该收发器1810可以用于通信装置进行通信，如用于发送或接收上述第一信息等。该存储器1821与所述处理器1822耦合，可用于保存通信装置1800实现各功能所必要的程序和数据。该处理器 1822被配置为支持通信装置1800执行上述方法中相应的功能，所述功能可通过调用存储器1821存储的程序实现。
具体的，该收发器1810可以是无线收发器，可用于支持通信装置1800通过无线空口进行接收和发送信令和/或数据。收发器1810也可被称为收发单元或通信单元，收发器1810可包括一个或多个射频单元1812以及一个或多个天线1811，其中，射频单元如远端射频单元(remote radio unit，RRU)或者有源天线单元(active antenna unit，AAU)，具体可用于射频信号的传输以及射频信号与基带信号的转换，该一个或多个天线具体可用于进行射频信号的辐射和接收。可选的，收发器1810可以仅包括以上射频单元，则此时通信装置1800可包括收发器1810、存储器1821、处理器1822以及天线1811。
存储器1821以及处理器1822可集成于一体也可相互独立。如图18所示，可将存储器1821以及处理器1822集成于通信装置1800的控制单元1820。示例性的，控制单元1820可包括LTE基站的基带单元(basebaLd uLit，BBU)，基带单元也可称为数字单元(digital uLit，DU)，或者，该控制单元1820可包括5G和未来无线接入技术下基站中的分布式单元(distribute uLit，DU)和/或集中单元(ceLtralized uLit，CU)。上述控制单元1820可由一个或多个天线面板构成，其中，多个天线面板可以共同支持单一接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE网络)，多个天线面板也可以分别支持不同接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE网络，5G网络或其他网络)。所述存储器1821和处理器1822可以服务于一个或多个天线面板。也就是说，可以每个天线面板上单独设置存储器1821和处理器1822。也可以是多个天线面板共用相同的存储器1821和处理器1822。此外每个天线面板上可以设置有必要的电路，如，该电路可用于实现存储器1821以及处理器1822的耦合。以上收发器1810、处理器1822以及存储器1821之间可通过总线(bus)结构和/或其他连接介质实现连接。
基于图18所示结构，当通信装置1800需要发送数据时，处理器1822可对待发送的数据进行基带处理后，输出基带信号至射频单元，射频单元将基带信号进行射频处理后将射频信号通过天线以电磁波的形式进行发送。当有数据发送到通信装置1800时，射频单元通过天线接收到射频信号，将射频信号转换为基带信号，并将基带信号输出至处理器1822，处理器1822将基带信号转换为数据并对该数据进行处理。
基于如图18所示结构，收发器1810可用于执行以上由收发模块1620所执行的步骤。和/或，处理器1822可用于调用存储器1821中的指令以执行以上由处理模块1610所执行的步骤。
图19示出了一种简化的终端设备的结构示意图。为了便于理解和图示方便，图19中，该终端设备以手机作为例子。如图19所示，终端设备包括处理器、存储器、射频电路、天线以及输入输出装置。处理器主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理，以及对该车载单元进行控制，执行软件程序，处理软件程序的数据等。存储器主要用于存储软件程序和数据。射频电路主要用于基带信号与射频信号的转换以及对射频信号的处理。天线主要用于收发电磁波形式的射频信号。输入输出装置，例如触摸屏、显示屏，键盘等主要用于接收用户输入的数据以及对用户输出数据。需要说明的是，有些种类的设备可以不具有输入输出装置。
当需要发送数据时，处理器对待发送的数据进行基带处理后，输出基带信号至射频电路，射频电路将基带信号进行射频处理后将射频信号通过天线以电磁波的形式向外发送。当有数据发送到该设备时，射频电路通过天线接收到射频信号，将射频信号转换为基带信 号，并将基带信号输出至处理器，处理器将基带信号转换为数据并对该数据进行处理。为便于说明，图19中仅示出了一个存储器和处理器。在实际的设备产品中，可以存在一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器。存储器也可以称为存储介质或者存储设备等。存储器可以是独立于处理器设置，也可以是与处理器集成在一起，本申请实施例对此不做限制。
在本申请实施例中，可以将具有收发功能的天线和射频电路视为该装置的收发单元，将具有处理功能的处理器视为该装置的处理单元。如图19所示，该装置包括收发单元1910和处理单元1920。收发单元1910也可以称为收发器、收发机、收发装置等。处理单元1920也可以称为处理器，处理单板，处理模块、处理装置等。可选的，可以将收发单元1910中用于实现接收功能的器件视为接收单元，将收发单元1910中用于实现发送功能的器件视为发送单元，即收发单元1910包括接收单元和发送单元。收发单元1910有时也可以称为收发机、收发器、或收发电路等。接收单元有时也可以称为接收机、接收器、或接收电路等。发送单元有时也可以称为发射机、发射器或者发射电路等。
应理解，收发单元1910用于执行上述方法实施例中终端设备侧的发送操作和接收操作，处理单元1920用于执行上述方法实施例中终端设备上除了收发操作之外的其他操作。
例如，在一种实现方式中，收发单元1910可以用于执行图5所示的实施例中的S501，S503，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。或者，收发单元1910可以用于执行图8所示的实施例中的S801，S803，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。或者，收发单元1910可以用于执行图13所示的实施例中的S1301，S1302，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
当该通信装置为芯片类的装置或者电路时，该装置可以包括收发单元和处理单元。其中，所述收发单元可以是输入输出电路和/或通信接口；处理单元为集成的处理器或者微处理器或者集成电路。
本申请实施例还提供一种通信系统，具体的，通信系统包括网络设备和终端设备，或者还可以包括更多个网络设备和多个终端设备。示例性的，通信系统包括用于实现上述图4的相关功能的网络设备和终端设备。
所述网络设备分别用于实现上述图5或图8或图13相关网络部分的功能。所述终端设备用于实现上述图5或图8或图13相关终端设备的功能。具体请参考上述方法实施例中的相关描述，这里不再赘述。
本申请实施例中还提供一种计算机可读存储介质，包括指令，当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行图5或图8或图13中网络设备执行的方法；或者当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行图5或图8中终端设备执行的方法。
本申请实施例中还提供一种计算机程序产品，包括指令，当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行图5或图8或图13中网络设备执行的方法；或者当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行图5或图8或图13中终端设备执行的方法。
本申请实施例提供了一种芯片系统，该芯片系统包括处理器，还可以包括存储器，用于实现前述方法中网络设备或终端的功能；或者用于实现前述方法中网络设备和终端的功能。该芯片系统可以由芯片构成，也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。
应理解，本申请实施例中的术语“系统”和“网络”可被互换使用。“至少一个”是指一个或者多个，“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”，描述关联对象的关联关系，表示可以存在三种关系，例如，A和/或B，可以表示：单独存在A，同时存在A和B，单独存在B 的情况，其中A，B可以是单数或者复数。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达，是指的这些项中的任意组合，包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如，a，b或c中的至少一项(个)，可以表示：a，b，c，a和b，a和c，b和c，或a、b和c，其中a，b，c可以是单个，也可以是多个。
以及，除非有相反的说明，本申请实施例提及“第一”、“第二”等序数词是用于对多个对象进行区分，不用于限定多个对象的顺序、时序、优先级或者重要程度。例如，第一subPDU和第二subPDU，只是为了区分不同的subPDU，而并不是表示这两种subPDU的优先级、或者重要程度等的不同。
应理解，在本申请的各种实施例中，上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后，各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定，而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到，结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各种说明性逻辑块(illustrative logical block)和步骤(step)，能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行，取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能，但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到，为描述的方便和简洁，上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程，可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程，在此不再赘述。
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中，应该理解到，所揭露的系统、装置和方法，可以通过其它的方式实现。例如，以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的，例如，所述单元的划分，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式，例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统，或一些特征可以忽略，或不执行。另一点，所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口，装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接，可以是电性，机械或其它的形式。
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的，作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元，即可以位于一个地方，或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时，可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解，本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来，该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中，包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机，服务器，或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括：U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。
显然，本领域的技术人员可以对本申请进行各种改动和变型而不脱离本申请的精神和范围。这样，倘若本申请的这些修改和变型属于本申请权利要求及其等同技术的范围之内，则本申请也意图包含这些改动和变型在内。

Claims (38)

  1. 一种随机接入方法，其特征在于，包括：
    在第一随机接入机会RO发送随机接入前导；
    根据所述第一RO的第一个正交频分复用OFDM符号的索引s_id、所述第一RO的第一个时隙的索引t_id、所述第一RO在频域的索引f_id、发送所述随机接入前导所使用的上行载波的标识ul_carrier_id和第一信息确定第一无线网络临时标识RNTI，并根据所述第一RNTI接收下行信道，其中，所述第一信息包括a、b、c以及d中的一种或多种，所述第一RNTI满足：
    第一RNTI＝1+s_id+a+14×(t_id+b)+14×80×(f_id+c)+14×80×8×(ul_carrier_id+d)。
  2. 如权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一信息与如下的至少一项特征参量相关联：
    终端设备的类型，终端设备的能力，终端设备的复杂度，终端设备的带宽，终端设备的天线数，消息3的传输类型，数据的传输类型，切片能力指示，部分带宽BWP标识ID，或BWP大小。
  3. 如权利要求1或2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述a的取值范围与以下至少一种参数相关：所述随机接入前导的长度、所述随机接入前导的时域资源的长度，或所述第一RO所在的BWP的配置。
  4. 如权利要求3所述的方法，其特征在于，所述b的取值范围与以下至少一种参数相关：所述随机接入前导的子载波间隔，所述随机接入前导的长度，所述随机接入前导的时域资源的长度，一个无线帧包括的可用于发送所述随机接入前导的时隙数，或一个子帧包括的可用于发送所述随机接入前导的时隙数。
  5. 如权利要求3或4所述的方法，其特征在于，满足如下的至少一项：
    所述a与所述s_id之和小于14；或，
    所述b与所述t_id之和小于80；或，
    所述c与所述f_id之和小于8；或，
    所述d与所述ul_carrier_id之和小于3。
  6. 如权利要求1-5任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，满足如下的至少一项：
    所述随机接入前导的时域资源的长度大于或等于L，所述L为大于2的整数；或，
    一个无线帧包括的可用于发送所述随机接入前导的时隙数小于或等于80；或，
    一个子帧包括的可用于发送所述随机接入前导的时隙数小于或等于N，所述N为小于2 μ的整数，μ为子载波间隔SCS参数；或，
    一个无线帧包括的可用于发送所述随机接入前导的子帧数小于或等于P，所述P为小于10的整数。
  7. 如权利要求2-6任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，不同的第一信息关联的特征参量集合不同，其中，所述特征参量集合包含一种或多种特征参量。
  8. 一种随机接入方法，其特征在于，包括：
    在第一随机接入机会RO接收来自终端设备的随机接入前导；
    基于第一信息，以及所述第一RO的第一个正交频分复用OFDM符号的索引s_id、所述第一RO的第一个时隙的索引t_id、所述第一RO在频域的索引f_id、发送所述随机接入 前导所使用的上行载波的标识ul_carrier_id确定第一无线网络临时标识RNTI，并基于所述第一RNTI发送下行信道；其中，所述第一信息包括a、b、c以及d中的一种或多种，所述第一RNTI满足：
    第一RNTI＝1+s_id+a+14×(t_id+b)+14×80×(f_id+c)+14×80×8×(ul_carrier_id+d)。
  9. 如权利要求8所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一信息与如下的至少一项特征参量相关联：
    终端设备的类型，终端设备的能力，终端设备的复杂度，终端设备的带宽，终端设备的天线数，消息3的传输类型，数据的传输类型，切片能力指示，部分带宽BWP标识ID，或BWP大小。
  10. 如权利要求8或9所述的方法，其特征在于，所述a的取值范围与以下至少一种参数相关：所述随机接入前导的长度、所述随机接入前导的时域资源的长度，所述第一RO所在的BWP的配置。
  11. 如权利要求10所述的方法，其特征在于，所述b的取值范围与以下至少一种参数相关：所述随机接入前导的子载波间隔，所述随机接入前导的长度，所述随机接入前导的时域资源的长度，一个无线帧包括的可用于发送所述随机接入前导的时隙数，一个子帧包括的可用于发送所述随机接入前导的时隙数。
  12. 如权利要求10或11所述的方法，其特征在于，满足如下的至少一项：
    所述a与所述s_id之和小于14；或，
    所述b与所述t_id之和小于80；或，
    所述c与所述f_id之和小于8；或，
    所述d与所述ul_carrier_id之和小于3。
  13. 如权利要求8-12任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，满足如下的至少一项：
    所述随机接入前导的时域资源的长度大于或等于L，所述L为大于2的整数；或，
    一个无线帧包括的可用于发送所述随机接入前导的时隙数小于或等于80；或，
    一个子帧包括的可用于发送所述随机接入前导的时隙数小于或等于N，所述N为小于2 μ的整数，μ为子载波间隔SCS参数；或，
    一个无线帧包括的可用于发送所述随机接入前导的子帧数小于或等于P，所述P为小于10的整数。
  14. 如权利要求9-13任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，不同的第一信息关联的特征参量集合不同，其中，所述特征参量集合包含一种或多种特征参量。
  15. 一种随机接入方法，其特征在于，包括：
    向网络设备发送随机接入前导；
    接收来自所述网络设备的媒体接入控制MAC协议数据单元PDU，所述MAC PDU包括多个子协议数据单元subPDU；
    确定M，并在与所述M关联的K个subPDU中获取针对所述随机接入前导的随机接入响应，所述M是正整数，所述K是正整数；其中，所述K个subPDU的前(K-1)个subPDU中的每个subPDU内的第一字段取值都为1，且所述K个subPDU的第一个subPDU的前一个subPDU的第一字段的取值为0，所述K个subPDU的第K个subPDU的第一字段的取值为0，所述第一字段为T字段或E字段。
  16. 一种随机接入方法，其特征在于，包括：
    接收来自终端设备的随机接入前导；
    基于无线网络临时标识RNTI对随机接入响应消息RAR进行加扰，并向所述终端设备发送MAC PDU，所述MAC PDU包括多个子协议数据单元subPDU，所述多个subPDU中与M关联的K个subPDU承载针对所述随机接入前导的随机接入响应，其中，所述K个subPDU的前(K-1)个subPDU中的每个subPDU内的第一字段取值都为1，且所述K个subPDU的第一个subPDU的前一个subPDU的第一字段的取值为0，所述K个subPDU的第K个subPDU的第一字段的取值为0，所述第一字段为T字段或E字段，所述M是正整数，所述K是正整数。
  17. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括处理模块和收发模块，其中，
    所述收发模块，用于在第一随机接入机会RO发送随机接入前导；
    所述处理模块，用于根据所述第一RO的第一个正交频分复用OFDM符号的索引s_id、所述第一RO的第一个时隙的索引t_id、所述第一RO在频域的索引f_id、发送所述随机接入前导所使用的上行载波的标识ul_carrier_id和第一信息确定第一无线网络临时标识RNTI；其中，所述第一信息包括a、b、c以及d中的一种或多种，所述第一RNTI满足：第一RNTI＝1+s_id+a+14×(t_id+b)+14×80×(f_id+c)+14×80×8×(ul_carrier_id+d)；
    所述收发模块，还用于根据所述第一RNTI接收下行信道。
  18. 如权利要求17所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一信息与如下的至少一项特征参量相关联：
    所述通信装置的类型，所述通信装置的能力，所述通信装置的复杂度，所述通信装置的带宽，所述通信装置的天线数，消息3的传输类型，数据的传输类型，切片能力指示，部分带宽BWP标识ID，或BWP大小。
  19. 如权利要求17或18所述的装置，其特征在于，所述a的取值范围与以下至少一种参数相关：所述随机接入前导的长度、所述随机接入前导的时域资源的长度，或所述第一RO所在的BWP的配置。
  20. 如权利要求19所述的装置，其特征在于，所述b的取值范围与以下至少一种参数相关：所述随机接入前导的子载波间隔，所述随机接入前导的长度，所述随机接入前导的时域资源的长度，一个无线帧包括的可用于发送所述随机接入前导的时隙数，或一个子帧包括的可用于发送所述随机接入前导的时隙数。
  21. 如权利要求19或20所述的装置，其特征在于，满足如下的至少一项：
    所述a与所述s_id之和小于14；或，
    所述b与所述t_id之和小于80；或，
    所述c与所述f_id之和小于8；或，
    所述d与所述ul_carrier_id之和小于3。
  22. 如权利要求17-21任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，满足如下的至少一项：
    所述随机接入前导的时域资源的长度大于或等于L，所述L为大于2的整数；或，
    一个无线帧包括的可用于发送所述随机接入前导的时隙数小于或等于80；或，
    一个子帧包括的可用于发送所述随机接入前导的时隙数小于或等于N，所述N为小于2 μ的整数，μ为子载波间隔SCS参数；或，
    一个无线帧包括的可用于发送所述随机接入前导的子帧数小于或等于P，所述P为小于10的整数。
  23. 如权利要求18-22任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，不同的第一信息关联的特征参量集合不同，其中，所述特征参量集合包含一种或多种特征参量。
  24. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括处理模块和收发模块，其中，
    所述收发模块，用于在第一随机接入机会RO接收来自终端设备的随机接入前导；
    所述处理模块，用于基于第一信息，以及所述第一RO的第一个正交频分复用OFDM符号的索引s_id、所述第一RO的第一个时隙的索引t_id、所述第一RO在频域的索引f_id、发送所述随机接入前导所使用的上行载波的标识ul_carrier_id确定第一无线网络临时标识RNTI，其中，所述第一信息包括a、b、c以及d中的一种或多种，所述第一RNTI满足：第一RNTI＝1+s_id+a+14×(t_id+b)+14×80×(f_id+c)+14×80×8×(ul_carrier_id+d)；
    所述收发模块，还用于基于所述第一RNTI发送下行信道。
  25. 如权利要求24所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一信息与如下的至少一项特征参量相关联：
    终端设备的类型，终端设备的能力，终端设备的复杂度，终端设备的带宽，终端设备的天线数，消息3的传输类型，数据的传输类型，切片能力指示，部分带宽BWP标识ID，或BWP大小。
  26. 如权利要求24或25所述的装置，其特征在于，所述a的取值范围与以下至少一种参数相关：所述随机接入前导的长度、所述随机接入前导的时域资源的长度，所述第一RO所在的BWP的配置。
  27. 如权利要求26所述的装置，其特征在于，所述b的取值范围与以下至少一种参数相关：所述随机接入前导的子载波间隔，所述随机接入前导的长度，所述随机接入前导的时域资源的长度，一个无线帧包括的可用于发送所述随机接入前导的时隙数，一个子帧包括的可用于发送所述随机接入前导的时隙数。
  28. 如权利要求26或27所述的装置，其特征在于，满足如下的至少一项：
    所述a与所述s_id之和小于14；或，
    所述b与所述t_id之和小于80；或，
    所述c与所述f_id之和小于8；或，
    所述d与所述ul_carrier_id之和小于3。
  29. 如权利要求24-28任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，满足如下的至少一项：
    所述随机接入前导的时域资源的长度大于或等于L，所述L为大于2的整数；或，
    一个无线帧包括的可用于发送所述随机接入前导的时隙数小于或等于80；或，
    一个子帧包括的可用于发送所述随机接入前导的时隙数小于或等于N，所述N为小于2 μ的整数，μ为子载波间隔SCS参数；或，
    一个无线帧包括的可用于发送所述随机接入前导的子帧数小于或等于P，所述P为小于10的整数。
  30. 如权利要求25-29任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，不同的第一信息关联的特征参量集合不同，其中，所述特征参量集合包含一种或多种特征参量。
  31. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括处理模块和收发模块，其中，
    所述收发模块，用于向网络设备发送随机接入前导，并接收来自所述网络设备的媒体接入控制MAC协议数据单元PDU；
    所述处理模块，用于确定M，并在与所述M关联的K个subPDU中获取针对所述随 机接入前导的随机接入响应，所述M是正整数，所述K是正整数；其中，所述K个subPDU的前(K-1)个subPDU中的每个subPDU内的第一字段取值都为1，且所述K个subPDU的第一个subPDU的前一个subPDU的第一字段的取值为0，所述K个subPDU的第K个subPDU的第一字段的取值为0，所述第一字段为T字段或E字段。
  32. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括处理模块和收发模块，其中，
    所述收发模块，用于接收来自终端设备的随机接入前导；
    所述处理模块，用于基于无线网络临时标识RNTI对随机接入响应消息RAR进行加扰；
    所述收发模块，还用于向所述终端设备发送所述MAC PDU，其中，所述MAC PDU包括多个子协议数据单元subPDU，所述多个subPDU中的与M关联的K个subPDU承载针对所述随机接入前导的随机接入响应，其中，所述K个subPDU的前(K-1)个subPDU中的每个subPDU内的第一字段取值都为1，且所述K个subPDU的第一个subPDU的前一个subPDU的第一字段的取值为0，所述K个subPDU的第K个subPDU的第一字段的取值为0，所述第一字段为T字段或E字段，所述M是正整数，所述K是正整数。
  33. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，所述通信装置包括处理器和通信接口以及存储器，所述处理器与所述通信接口耦合，用于调用所述存储器中的计算机指令使得所述通信装置执行如权利要求1-7任一项所述的方法。
  34. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，所述通信装置包括处理器和通信接口以及存储器，所述处理器与所述通信接口耦合，用于调用所述存储器中的计算机指令使得所述通信装置执行如权利要求8-14任一项所述的方法。
  35. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，所述通信装置包括处理器和通信接口以及存储器，所述处理器与所述通信接口耦合，用于调用所述存储器中的计算机指令使得所述通信装置执行如权利要求15所述的方法。
  36. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，所述通信装置包括处理器和通信接口以及存储器，所述处理器与所述通信接口耦合，用于调用所述存储器中的计算机指令使得所述通信装置执行如权利要求16所述的方法。
  37. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其特征在于，所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机指令，当所述计算机指令被执行时，使所述计算机执行如权利要求1-7任一项所述的方法，或者，使所述计算机执行如权利要求15所述的方法。
  38. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其特征在于，所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机指令，当所述计算机指令被执行时，使所述计算机执行如权利要求8-14任一项所述的方法，或者，使所述计算机执行如权利要求16所述的方法。
PCT/CN2022/101293 2021-07-16 2022-06-24 一种随机接入方法及通信装置 Ceased WO2023284534A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP22841173.2A EP4362596A4 (en) 2021-07-16 2022-06-24 RANDOM ACCESS METHOD AND COMMUNICATION APPARATUS

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202110805895.6 2021-07-16
CN202110805895.6A CN115623605A (zh) 2021-07-16 2021-07-16 一种随机接入方法及通信装置

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2023284534A1 true WO2023284534A1 (zh) 2023-01-19

Family

ID=84854774

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2022/101293 Ceased WO2023284534A1 (zh) 2021-07-16 2022-06-24 一种随机接入方法及通信装置

Country Status (3)

Country Link
EP (1) EP4362596A4 (zh)
CN (1) CN115623605A (zh)
WO (1) WO2023284534A1 (zh)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN117596705A (zh) * 2024-01-19 2024-02-23 北京小米移动软件有限公司 通信方法、终端、网络设备、通信系统及存储介质

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN103987106A (zh) * 2009-01-02 2014-08-13 Lg电子株式会社 用户设备的随机接入方案
CN112218381A (zh) * 2019-07-11 2021-01-12 普天信息技术有限公司 随机接入响应方法及装置
WO2021083886A1 (en) * 2019-11-01 2021-05-06 Sony Corporation Communications device, infrastructure equipment and methods

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN103987106A (zh) * 2009-01-02 2014-08-13 Lg电子株式会社 用户设备的随机接入方案
CN112218381A (zh) * 2019-07-11 2021-01-12 普天信息技术有限公司 随机接入响应方法及装置
WO2021083886A1 (en) * 2019-11-01 2021-05-06 Sony Corporation Communications device, infrastructure equipment and methods

Non-Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
See also references of EP4362596A4 *
SONY: "RA-RNTI ambiguity for CFRA and CBRA of 4-Step RACH", 3GPP DRAFT; R2-2000832, vol. RAN WG2, 13 February 2020 (2020-02-13), Elbonia, pages 1 - 3, XP051848623 *
ZTE CORPORATION, SANECHIPS: "Discussion on the ambiguity in Msg2 reception", 3GPP DRAFT; R2-1814044 DISCUSSION ON THE AMBIGUITY IN MSG2 RECEPTION, vol. RAN WG2, 27 September 2018 (2018-09-27), Chengdu, China, pages 1 - 10, XP051523505 *

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN117596705A (zh) * 2024-01-19 2024-02-23 北京小米移动软件有限公司 通信方法、终端、网络设备、通信系统及存储介质
CN117596705B (zh) * 2024-01-19 2024-04-30 北京小米移动软件有限公司 通信方法、终端、网络设备、通信系统及存储介质

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP4362596A4 (en) 2024-10-30
EP4362596A1 (en) 2024-05-01
CN115623605A (zh) 2023-01-17

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11153917B2 (en) System and method for random access backoffs
JP7317873B2 (ja) 無線通信システムにおいてリソースを選択してｐｓｓｃｈを伝送する方法及び装置
CN113424631B (zh) 执行上行链路传输的方法、用户设备、设备和存储介质以及执行上行链路接收的方法和基站
CN113273296B (zh) 用于发送上行链路的方法、用户设备、装置和存储介质以及用于接收上行链路的方法和基站
RU2687033C1 (ru) Передача ответного сообщения произвольного доступа
US12526838B2 (en) Indication of TBS scaling and repetition for MSG4 PDSCH
CN105830467B (zh) 用于上行和下行传输的wlan ofdma设计的系统和方法
CN119997254A (zh) 用于支持大随机接入响应（rar）窗口大小的随机接入过程的方法
US11582634B2 (en) Transport block size (TBS) configuration for small data transfer
CN115088377A (zh) 用于无线通信系统中的随机接入过程的方法和装置
KR20200120621A (ko) 비면허 대역에서 새로운 무선 동작을 위한 채널 액세스 방법 및 lbt(listen-before-talk) 솔루션
TW201906480A (zh) 用於補充上行鏈路隨機存取配置的技術和裝置
EP2995152B1 (en) Systems and methods for operation of wireless user devices with cellular and wi-fi interfaces
KR20200035037A (ko) 동기화 신호 블록 위치 결정
CN116420416B (zh) 一种通信方法及装置
US11129205B2 (en) Apparatus and method for configuring channel resource in wireless communication system
US11570806B2 (en) Conditional configured grant (CG) occasions for uplink transmission
US12446075B2 (en) Random access radio network temporary identifier for higher subcarrier spacing
CN113396630A (zh) 用户装置及控制方法
CN115066967A (zh) 终端
EP3965517A1 (en) Base station device and user equipment
CN112399600A (zh) 确定上行传输时域资源的方法和装置
WO2023051324A1 (zh) 一种随机接入前导的发送方法、接收方法及通信装置
CN114208340A (zh) 对随机接入消息的响应的可配置模式
EP4362596A1 (en) Random access method and communication apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 22841173

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2022841173

Country of ref document: EP

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2022841173

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20240126

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE